| all | frequencies |
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
|
exhibits | applications |
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| manuals | |||||||||||||
| app s | submitted / available | |||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1.01 MiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Quick Start Guide | Users Manual | 593.50 KiB | / December 07 2007 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Radio Info | Users Manual | 68.56 KiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual | Users Manual | 804.37 KiB | December 03 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual Supplement | Users Manual | 377.47 KiB | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual part 1 | Users Manual | 2.26 MiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual part 3 | Users Manual | 1.34 MiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
User Manual part 4 | Users Manual | 1.07 MiB | January 05 2008 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
|
Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB | / December 07 2007 | |||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Attestation Statements | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | External Photos | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | January 05 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Internal Photos | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | February 04 2008 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Operational Description | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Attestation Statements | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | / December 07 2007 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | RF Exposure Info | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Report | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Test Setup Photos | July 06 2005 | ||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | ID Label/Location Info | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) | |||||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Cover Letter(s) |
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Compliance Insert | Users Manual | 1.01 MiB | January 05 2008 |
6820 Compliance Insert For Users in the United States and Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. Attention: Ce marquage indique que lusager doit, avant lutilisation, lire toute la documentation incluse. Users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Utilisateurs de ce produit sont aviss dutiliser des accessoires et des priphriques approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation. Lutilisation daccessoires autres que ceux recommands ou des changements ce produit qui ne sont pas approuvs par Intermec Technologies Corporation peuvent annuler la conformit de ce produit et mettre fin au droit qua lusager dutiliser l'quipement. FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Canadian Digital Apparatus Compliance These Class B digital products meet all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. Conformit aux normes canadiennes sur les appareils numriques Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Battery Information Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Attention: Le bloc-piles utilis dans cet appareil peut prendre feu, constituer un risque de brlure chimique, exploser ou dgager des substances toxiques sil est manipul de faon inapproprie. Ne pas jeter au feu, dmonter ou chauffer plus de 100 C (212 F). Ne pas court-circuiter; cela pourrait causer des brlures. Garder hors de la porte des enfants. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Ce produit contient ou utilise une pile au plomb. Lorsque la batterie atteint la fin de sa dure de vie utile, la batterie uses doivent tre mises aux rebuts par un agent de recyclage ou un manipulateur de matriaux dangereux agr. Il ne faut pas mlanger la batterie aux autres dchets solides. Pour plus dinformations sur le recyclage ou la mise aux rebuts, contacter votre centre de services Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent lead-acid batteries as hazardous waste. Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts. Connexions du bloc dalimentation Attention: Employez le model dIntermec AE2 ou AE27 pour lalimentation dnergie. Il ne contient aucune pice parable par lutilisateur. Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) Radio Wave or Radio Frequency Maximum Permissive Exposure (MPE) for Model 6820 with Intermec mobile computers. When installing and using the Intermec 6820, a 20 cm (8 in) passing distance must be maintained from the body or head of the user or nearby persons and the device. This product meets FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with FCC RF exposure guidelines. For Users Outside of the United States or Canada Caution: This marking indicates that the user should read all included documentation before use. The users of this product are cautioned to use accessories and peripherals approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation. The use of accessories other than those recommended, or changes to this product that are not approved by Intermec Technologies Corporation, may void the compliance of this product and may result in the loss of the users authority to operate the equipment. Battery Information Caution: The battery pack used in this device may ignite, create a chemical burn hazard, explode, or release toxic materials if mistreated. Do not incinerate, disassemble, or heat above 100C (212F). Do not short circuit; may cause burns. Keep away from children. Battery Recycling Information This product contains or uses a lead acid battery. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Pb Pb Power Supply Connections Caution: Use Intermec Model AE2 or AE27 for the power supply. No user-serviceable parts.
Intermec Technologies Corporation Intermec Technologies Corporation 100 C (212 F) Intermec Pb Pb Intermec AE2 AE27 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada oder den Vereinigten Staaten Vorsicht: Diese Kennzeichnung weist darauf hin, dass der Benutzer vor dem Gebrauch alle mitgelieferten Unterlagen lesen soll. Die Benutzer dieses Produkts werden darauf hingewiesen, nur Zubehrteile und Peripheriegerte zu verwenden, die von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind. Falls nicht empfohlene Zubehrteile verwendet oder an diesem Produkt nderungen vorgenommen werden, die nicht von Intermec Technologies Corporation genehmigt sind, kann dadurch die behrdliche Konformitt des Produkts verletzt werden und der Benutzer die Berechtigung zur Verwendung des Gerts verlieren. Akku-Informationen Vorsicht: Der in diesem Gert verwendete Akkusatz kann sich bei Missbrauch entznden, chemische Vertzungen verursachen, expoldieren oder toxische Substanzen freisetzen. Nicht verbrennen, zerlegen oder ber 100 C (212 F) erwrmen. Keinen Kurzschluss verursachen; Verbrennungsgefahr. Von Kindern fern halten. Informationen zum Recycling von Batterien Dieses Produkt enthlt oder verwendet einen Bleisureakku. Wenn die Batterie ausgedient hat, sollte sie durch einen qualifizierten Recycler oder durch den Sondermll entsorgt werden. Werfen Sie die Batterie nicht in den Abfall. Setzen Sie sich mit Ihrem Intermec Technologies Service-Zentrum in Verbindung, um weitere Informationen zum Recycling oder Entsorgen zu erhalten. Pb Pb Stromanschlsse Vorsicht: Als Netzteil Intermec Modell AE2 oder AE27 verwenden. Enthlt keine Teile, die vom Benutzer gewartet werden knnen.
: . Intermec Technologies Corporation . Intermec Technologies Corporation ,
. 100C (212 F) . . . ,
. . Intermec . Pb Pb
: Intermec AE2 AE27 . . Para usurios fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos Cuidado: Esta identificao indica que o usurio deve ler toda a documentao fornecida antes do uso. Se advierte a los usuarios de este producto que usen accesorios y perifricos aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation. El uso de accesorios aparte de los recomendados, o los cambios a este producto que no estn aprobados por Intermec Technologies Corporation, pueden anular el cumplimiento de este producto y ocasionar la prdida de la autorizacin del usuario para operar el equipo. Informaes sobre a bateria Cuidado: A bateria utilizada neste dispositivo pode pegar fogo, criar risco de queimadura qumica, explodir ou exalar materiais txicos se abusada. No incinerar, desmontar nem aquecer a bateria a mais de 100C (212F). No provocar curto-circuito, pois pode causar queimaduras. Manter afastada de crianas. Infomaes de Reciclagem de Bateria Este produto contm ou usa bateria chumbo-cido. Quando a bateria chega ao fim da sua vida til, deve ser descartada por um profissional de reciclagem qualificado ou por um especialista no manuseio de materiais perigosos. No misture a bateria com fluxo de lixo slido. Entre em contato com seu Centro de Servios de Tecnologia Intermec para informaes de reciclagem ou descarte. Pb Pb Conexes da fonte de alimentao Ciudado: Usar fontes de alimentao Intermec Modelo AE2 ou AE27. No h nenhuma pea que possa ser substituda ou consertada pelo usurio.
, , Intermec Technologies Corporation. , ,
, Intermec Technologies Corporation,
. , , 100C (212 F). .
. - Intermec Technologies. Pb Pb
: Intermec AE2 AE27. ,
, . Para usuarios fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Precaucin: Esta marca indica que el usuario debe leer toda la documentacin incluida antes del uso. Os usurios deste produto devem usar acessrios e perifricos aprovados pela Intermec Technologies Corporation. Usar acessrios no recomendados, ou fazer alteraes neste produto no aprovadas pela Intermec Technologies Corporation, poder anular a conformidade deste produto e resultar na perda da permisso do usurio de utilizar o equipamento. Informacin de la batera Precaucin: La batera que se usa en este dispositivo puede encenderse, crear un peligro de quemadura qumica, explotar o expedir materiales txicos si se trata indebidamente. No la incinere, desarme ni caliente sobre 100C (212F). No haga cortocircuitos porque pueden causar quemaduras. Mantngala alejada de los nios. Informacin acerca del reciclaje de la batera Este producto contiene o usa una batera de cido de plomo. Cuando la batera llega al final de su vida til, debe ser desechada por personal especializado en reciclaje de materiales o manejo de materiales peligrosos. No mezcle la batera con otros residuos slidos. Pnganse en contacto con su Centro de servicio de Intermec Technologies para obtener informacin sobre reciclaje o desecho de materiales. Pb Pb Conexiones de la fuente de alimentacin Precaucin: Para la fuente de alimentacin use el Modelo AE2 o AE27 de Intermec. No hay piezas a las cuales pueda dar servicio el usuario. Worldwide Headquarters Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies 2006 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Corporation. All rights reserved. 6820 Compliance Insert
*933-059-004*
P/N 933-059-004
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Quick Start Guide | Users Manual | 593.50 KiB | / December 07 2007 |
The CK32AS Handheld Computer ships with a partially charged battery pack. You will need an AC11 Quad Battery Charger (P/N 852-914-xxx) to fully charge the battery and use the CK32 I-Safe. (Power supply and power cord are sold separately.) Where to Find More Information To download manuals:
For Product Support:
CK32AS AC11
(P/N 852-914-xxx) CK32 I-Safe CK32AS AC11 Quad (P/N 852-914-xxx) CK32 I-Safe
O trouver dautres dtails Pour tlcharger les manuels:
Pour le support de produit:
Verweise zu weiteren Informationen Lordinateur portatif CK32AS est livr avec un bloc-piles partiellement charg. Lutilisation du chargeur de bloc-piles quadruple AC11 (rf. 852-914-xxx) pour la recharge complte du bloc-piles et lutilisation de CK32 I-Safe) est obligatoire. (Alimentation et cordon dalimentation vendus sparment.) Per saperne di pi Der handgehaltene Computer CK32AS wird mit einem teilweise geladenen Akkusatz ausgeliefert. Sie bentigen ein Akkuladegert mit 4 Steckpltzen AC11 (Bestellnr. 852-
914-xxx), um den Akku vollstndig aufzuladen und das Modell CK32 I-Safe zu verwenden.
(Netzteil und Netzkabel sind separat erhltlich.) Il computer palmare CK32AS fornito con una batteria parzialmente caricata. Utilizzare un caricabatteria quadruplo AC11 (n. catalogo 852-914-xxx) per caricare completamente la batteria e utilizzare il CK32 I-Safe. (Lalimentatore e il cavo di alimentazione sono acquistabili separatamente.) Onde obter mais informaes Dnde encontrar ms informacin Herunterladen von Handbchern:
Produktuntersttzung:
Per scaricare i manuali:
Richiedere assistenza:
Para baixar os manuais:
Para obter suporte ao produto:
www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 Para descargar manuales:
Para asistencia de Productos:
www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Quick Start Guide Guide de dmarrage de lordinateur portatif Kurzanleitung fr handgehaltenen Computer Manuale di avvio rapido per computer palmare Manual de Consulta Rpida do Coletor de Dados Porttil Gua de comienzo rpido para la computadora de mano CK32 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 1.800.755.5505 www.intermec.com Intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 www.intermec.com intermec.custhelp.com 425.356.1799 CK32AS . CK32 I-Safe AC11
(P/N 852-914-xxx) . ( ) Caution: See Compliance Insert for use restrictions associated with this product O coletor de dados porttil CK32AS despachado com a bateria parcialmente carregada. Ser necessrio um carregador qudruplo de baterias AC11 (N/P 852-914-xxx) para carregar completamente a bateria e usar o CK32 I-Safe (intrinsecamente seguro). (Fonte e cabo de alimentao vendidos separadamente.) La computadora de mano CK32AS se despacha con una batera parcialmente cargada. Necesitar un Cargador de batera Quad AC11 (P/N 852-914-xxx) para cargarla totalmente y usar el CK32 I-Safe. (Se venden por separado la fuente y el cable de alimentacin.) This product is protected by one or more patents. Ce produit est protege par un brevet ou plus. Dieses Produkt ist durch ein oder mehrere Patente geschutzt. Questo prodotto protetto da uno o pi dei seguenti brevetti. Este produto est protegido por uma ou mais patentes. Este producto esta protegido por una o varias patentes. Attention: Consultez la Dclaration de conformit pour les restrictions dusage associes ce produit. Vorsicht: Das Konformittsblatt fhrt etwaige Verwendungseinschrnkungen fr dieses Produkt an. Attenzione: consultare linserto sulla conformit per informazioni sulle limitazioni duso di questo prodotto.
: . Cuidado: Consulte as informaes sobre as restries de uso associadas a este produto no encarte sobre conformidade. Precaucin: Consulte el Inserto de cumplimiento para ver las restricciones de uso asociadas con este producto. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Quick Start Guide
*930-167-001*
P/N 930-167-001 Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2007 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Q uick Start G C K 32 uide 3
. Q u i c k S t a r t G C K 3 u i d 2 e Keyboard status lights Voyants dtat du clavier Tastaturstatusleuchten Spie di stato della tastiera Luzes indicadoras de status do teclado Luces de estado del teclado Good read light Voyant Lecture de bonne qualit Leuchte Erfolgreich abgelesen Spia di lettura Luz de boa leitura Luz de buena lectura Battery light Voyant du bloc-piles Akkuleuchte Spia della batteria Luz da bateria Luces defi nidas por el usuario Luz de la batera Reset switch Voyant de rinitialisation Rcksetztaste Tasto Reset Luz da bateria Chave de reinicializao Interruptor de reajuste Power key Touche Alimentation Netztaste Tasto di alimentazione Tecla liga/desliga Tecla de encendido Backlight Rtroclairage Hintergrundbeleuchtung Retroilluminazione Luz de fundo Luz posterior Scanner window Fentre du lecteur Scanner-Fenster Finestra scanner Spia di lettura Janela do leitor Ventana del escner Scan button Touche de balayage Scan-Taste Tasto Scansione Boto de leitura Botn para escanear 10 9 8 12 11 1 7 5 6 2 4 3 Battery Bloc-piles Akku Batteria Bateria Batera CK32 I-Safe Wired communications port Port de communication cbl Kommunikationskabelanschluss Porta di comunicazione cablata Porta de comunicao com fi o Puerto almbrico de comunicaciones Stylus Stylet Stift Stilo Caneta stylus Puntero
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Radio Info | Users Manual | 68.56 KiB | January 05 2008 |
Part No. 074821-001 Important BTS080 Information!
Contents For Users in the United States and Canada....................................................................... 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada............................................................. 3 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis.................................................... 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten................................................ 6 Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti ......................................................... 6 Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos ...................................................... 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos ......................................................... 8 For Users in the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and (2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that can cause undesired operation. Federal Communications Commission Compliance FCC Digital Emissions Compliance This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna. Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver. receiver is connected. Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Operation Warning To comply with the FCCs RF exposure requirements and minimize health hazards:
The user shall not touch the antenna of this device when the device is in use. Caution Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. Industry Canada Compliance This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of the Canadian Interference-Causing Equipment Regulations. This device requires a radio license unless it is used totally inside a building. (The user must obtain this license.) Cet appareil numrique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du Rglement sur le matriel brouilleur du Canada. Cet appareil exige une license radio moins dtre entirement install dans un btiment. (Lutilisateur doit obtenir cette license.) 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec Web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Model BTS080 is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) The original Declaration of Conformity is available on the Intermec Technologies Corporation Web site at www.intermec.com. This product transmits electromagnetic waves at 2.4 GHz frequency range. It has been tested and found compliant with CENELEC EN50360 and EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Guide 65), and Canadian (RSS 102) RF exposure regulations. The transmitter modules output power is 11.9 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. 0981 This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are not harmonized throughout the European Community. The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. 3 Country of Intended Use Yes Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Latvia Lithuania Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Other non-EU:
Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X License No Required Restrictions Details X Indoor use only Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. 4 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etat-unis Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site Web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce modle BTS080 est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes :
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11) La Dclaration de conformit originale est disponible sur le site Web dIntermec Technologies Corporation, ladresse www.intermec.com. Ce produit met des ondes lectromagntiques une plage de frquences de 2,4 GHz. Il a t valu et reconnu conforme aux rglements concernant lexposition la radiofrquence de CENELEC EN50360 et EN50361, de 1999/519/EC, de ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, des tats-Unis (OET Guide 65), et du Canada (RSS 102). La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 11.9 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. 0981 Ce produit est marqu de ce logo et il utilise des bandes de frquence radio qui ne sont pas harmonises sur le territoire de la Communaut europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Oui Licence requise Non Restrictions Dtails France X X Pour l'usage d'intrieur seulement. Conformit additionelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-
Spreizspektrumsystems. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfiguriern der Sende-Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Modell BTS080 mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) Die Originalkonformittserklrung steht auf der Website der Intermec Technologies Corporation unter www.intermec.com zur Verfgung. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit CENELEC EN50360 und EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, U.S. (OET Anleitung 65), und kanadischen (RSS 102) RF-
Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 11.9 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. 0981 Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft nicht berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia DSSS (spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito Web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Modello BTS080 conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11) 6 La dichiarazione di conformit originale disponibile presso il sito Web di Intermec Technologies Corporation a www.intermec.com. Questo prodotto trasmette onde elettromagnetiche con una frequenza intorno ai 2,4 GHz. Dai collaudi ai quali stato sottoposto risultato conforme alle norme CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, 1999/519/EC, ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, statunitensi (OET Guide 65), e a quelle canadesi (RSS 102) relative allesposizione alle radiofrequenze. La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 11.9 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. 0981 Questo prodotto reca questo marchio ed utilizza bande di radiofrequnza che non sono armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado de 2,4 GHz. Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Modelo BTS080 cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11) La Declaracin de Conformidad original est disponible en el sitio web de Intermec Technologies Corporation: www.intermec.com. Este producto transmite ondas electromagnticas de radio en la gama de frecuencias de 2,4 GHz. Ha sido probado y se ha determinado que cumple con las reglamentaciones del CENELEC EN50360 y EN50361, del 1999/519/EC, del ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, de los EE.UU. (OET Guide 65), y del Canad (RSS 102), referentes a la exposicin de RF. La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 11.9 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. 0981 Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y usa bandas de frecuencia de radio que no han sido armonizadas a lo largo de la Unin Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. 7 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema Espectro de Difuso de 2,4 GHz. As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Modelo BTS080 atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.4.1 (2003-04) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11) A Declarao de Conformidade original est disponvel no site da web da Intermec Technologies Corporation no endereo www.intermec.com. Este produto transmite ondas eletromagnticas na faixa de freqncia de 2,4 GHz. Ele foi testado e aprovado quanto sua conformidade com os regulamentos de exposio RF do CENELEC EN50360 e EN50361, do 1999/519/EC, do ACA Radiocommunications Standard 2003, dos EUA (OET Guide 65), e do Canad (RSS 102). A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 11.9 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. 0981 Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que no esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com 2004 Intermec Technologies Corp. All Rights Reserved Important BTS080 Information!
*074821-001*
P/N 074821-001
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual | Users Manual | 804.37 KiB | December 03 2008 |
Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Contents Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader . 3 What You Get . 3 Using the IP4 . 3 Charging and Installing the Battery . 3 Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color. 5
(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge . 6 Reading an RFID Tag . 8 Understanding the IP4 LEDs . 9 Specifications . 10 ii IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions IP4 Portable RFID Reader Introducing the IP4 Portable RFID Reader The IP4 Portable RFID Reader is an accessory handle for the 700 Series Color mobile computers. Together, the IP4 and 700 Color provide a high-performance mobile RFID solution that allows you to bring the read/write device to the tagged product rather than moving tagged products past a fixed reader. What You Get Battery (Model AB12) Product documentation Using the IP4 To use the IP4, you need to perform these steps:
1 Charge and install the battery. 2 Attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 3 (Optional) Configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge. 4 Read an RFID tag. These instructions describe each step. Charging and Installing the Battery To charge the IP4 battery, you need the Dual Pack Battery Charger (Model AC12). To charge the IP4 battery Insert the battery into a slot on the AC12 battery charger. A fully discharged battery charges in less than 4 hours. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 3 To install the battery 1 Insert the battery tab on the top of the battery into the IP4. Battery tab 2 Firmly press the bottom of the battery onto the IP4 until the battery snaps into place. To remove the battery Push the battery release latch on the bottom of the IP4. Battery release latch 4 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Attaching Your IP4 to a 700 Color Your IP4 uses Infrared Data Association (IrDA) to communicate with the 700 Color. The lightpipe in the IP4 helps communicate the IrDA signal between the 700 Color and your IP4. Lightpipe Note: Do not remove the lightpipe from the IP4. To attach your IP4 to a 700 Color 1 Slide the 700 Color into the IP4 until it clicks into place. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 5 2 Secure the retaining screws, making sure that they are inserted straight into the 700 Color. To remove your IP4 from a 700 Color 1 Remove the two retaining screws. 2 Hold the 700 Color at the display. 3 While lifting the 700 Color up (away from the IP4), pull the 700 Color forward and out of the IP4.
(Optional) Configuring Your IP4 as a Keyboard Wedge You can configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge to allow the 700 Color to receive data from your IP4 as it would from a keyboard. To use your IP4 as a keyboard wedge, the 700 Color and your IP4 must meet these requirements:
The 700 Color must have at least 64MB of flash ROM. The fifth character in the configuration number (CN) found on the back of the 700 Color must not be a 4 or 5. For example:
751B6xxxx meets this requirement. 760A4xxxx does not meet this requirement. 6 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions The 700 Color must be running one of these operating systems (OS):
4.95.1 or later Prem (Premium) 4.96.4 or later GSM Phone If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an A:
The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1043 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 5.19 or later. If the fourth character in the configuration number (CN) of your IP4 is an B:
The 700 Color must be running IVA 4.03.35.1050 or later. Your IP4 must be running firmware version 7.16 or later. Note: Use Intermec Settings to find the OS and IVA versions of the 700 Color. For help, see the users manual for the 700 Color. To configure your IP4 as a keyboard wedge 1 Fully charge your IP4 battery and attach your IP4 to a 700 Color. 2 On the 700 Color, start Intermec Settings. 3 Select RFID > Reader 1, and select Enable Reader. 4 Under Reader 1, select Reader Module > Tag Type, and select the type of RFID tag you are using. 5 From the main Intermec Settings menu, select Device Settings > Keypad > Scan Button Remapping > Handle Trigger, and select RFID. 6 Save your settings. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 7 To test the keyboard wedge 1 Start Microsoft Pocket Word. 2 Read an RFID tag. For help, see the next section. The RFID tag information appears in Pocket Word. Reading an RFID Tag You can scan at least six RFID tags per second with the IP4. Note: Continuously reading tags with the IP4 may cause the IP4 to overheat. If the IP4 temperature rises above the maximum operating temperature, the IP4 will stop reading tags. If this occurs, let the IP4 cool down until its temperature is within the operating temperature range. RF Exposure regulations limit exposure to radio frequency (RF) radiation. To comply with these regulations, operators of this device must maintain a distance of at least 20 cm (8 in) from the cover on the antenna assembly. (The cover on the antenna is the dome-shaped surface.) While the device is on, the operators body and parts of the body such as eyes, hands, or head, must be 20 cm (8 in) or farther from the cover of the antenna assembly. Avertissement: Les rglementations sur les expositions RF limitent l'exposition aux rayonnements RF. Pour se conformer ces rglementations, les oprateurs de ce dispositif doivent maintenir une distance minimale de 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. (Le couvercle de l'antenne est la surface bombe.) Lorsque l'appareil est sous tension, le corps et les parties du corps
(yeux, mains, tte) de l'oprateur doivent tre au moins 20 cm du couvercle de l'antenne. To read an RFID tag 1 Position the front of the IP4 within 91 cm (3 ft) of an RFID tag. 2 Pull the trigger. 8 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Understanding the IP4 LEDs Your IP4 uses LEDs to indicate the status of certain operations. LEDs IP4 LEDs: The IP4 LEDs are located on the back of the IP4. IP4 LED Descriptions Icon LED Description Power (PWR) This LED is green when +5 power is on and the IP4 is ready to read tags. This LED is green when data Host Communications
(HOST COMM) communication with the host is active. RF Power On (RF ON) This LED is green when RF power is Tag Communications
(TAG COMM) Battery
(BATT) on. This LED turns green after the IP4 successfully reads an RFID tag. This LED indicates the status of the battery:
Red: The battery is low (less than 20% capacity). Green: The battery is fully charged
(more than 80% capacity). Orange: The battery is charged
(from 20% to 80% capacity). IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 9 Specifications This section contains specifications for the IP4. Environmental Specifications Specification Value Operating temperature 0C to 50C (32F to 122F) Storage temperature Relative humidity
-30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) 5 to 95% non-condensing 869 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Single Channel 869.525 MHz 0.5 watt ERP Minimum = 26.0 dBm Typical = 26.5 dBm Maximum = 27.0 dBm 80%
N/A 915 MHz Frequency Specification Value Source type Frequency band EIRP/ERP Output power 1 W maximum Modulation Data Rate Frequency hopper 902-928 MHz 1 watt EIRP Minimum = 28.5 dBm Typical = 29.5 dBm Maximum = 30.0 dBm 90%
38 to 44 Kbps 10 IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions Performance Specification Value RFID tag identification rate At least six tags per second with one to ten tags in the RF field, located at half the maximum reading distances from the IP4 front panel. RFID tag read distance 91 cm (3 ft) RFID tag data exchange rates Read a tag containing 8 bytes of data within 50 ms. Perform a verified write to tag at an average rate of 75 ms per byte per tag. Firmware Architecture Specification Description Firmware Communicates in Basic Reader Interface
(BRI) mode. Protocol/Compatibility ANSI NCITS 256.2000 for API, part 2, part 3-1 Reader Configuration Access Summary Control Mechanism Responsible Party Factory or Intermec Field Technician Remote or on-site field technician Customer System Administrator Hardware key or configuration tag Intermec-only password Configuration file Function Change Country Code Download updated firmware Setup, system configuration not secured at higher level, such as change battery or wake up default IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions 11 Patent Information Product is covered by one or more of the following patents:
5,673,037; 5,729,697; 5,777,561; 5,828,318; 5,850,187;
5,912,632; 5,942,987; 5,995,019; 6,032,127; 6,121,878;
6,172,596; 6,286,762; 6,288,629; 6,422,476; 6,429,775;
6,525,648; 6,529,880; 6,608,551; 6,639,509; 6,812,841;
6,812,852; 6,919,793. Patent Application 2002-0046173. There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2007 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. IP4 Portable RFID Reader Instructions
*943-002-004*
P/N 943-002-004
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual Supplement | Users Manual | 377.47 KiB |
PRELIMINARY DRAFT P/N 074476-001 Note: You only need to read this information if your Intermec product has a Bluetooth compatible module from Actiontec Electronics. Important BTM311 Bluetooth Radio Information!
Contents For Users in the United States and Canada.................................................. 2 For Users Outside of the United States and Canada..................................... 3 Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etats-unis .......................... 5 Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten ............... 6 Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti................................. 7 Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos .............................. 8 Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos................................. 9
..................................................... 9 For Users in the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS-210 of Industry Canada. Operation is subject to the following two conditions: (1) This device may not cause harmful interference, and
(2) This device must accept any interference received, including interference that can cause undesired operation. Federal Communications Commission Compliance FCC Digital Emissions Compliance: This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device, pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules. These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation. This equipment generates, uses, and can radiate radio frequency energy and, if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions, may cause harmful interference to radio communications. However, there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation. If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception, which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on, the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures:
Reorient or relocate the radio or television receiving antenna.
Increase the separation between the computer equipment and receiver.
Connect the equipment to an outlet on a circuit different from that to which the radio or television receiver is connected.
Consult the dealer or an experienced radio television technician for help. Changes or modifications not expressly approved by Intermec could void the users authority to operate this equipment. 2 PRELIMINARY DRAFT This radio meets the FCC RF exposure guidelines when used with the Intermec accessories supplied or designated for this product. Use of other accessories may not ensure compliance with the FCC RF exposure guidelines. Specific Absorption Rate, or SAR, is a measurement of radio frequency energy. This radio is categorically exempt from routine SAR evaluation. The FCC excludes radios from routine SAR evaluation if the maximum peak power is less than 24.5 mW. The maximum peak power for this radio, as measured using corresponding FCC requirements, is 13.8 mW. Use of any other transmitting devices within 20 cm
(8 in) of this radio could void the users authority to operate this equipment. For Users Outside of the United States and Canada Place this supplement in your manual. The Intermec product you purchased transmits and receives data using a 2.4 GHz Frequency Hopping Spread Spectrum system. Programming and configuration information for the transceivers is also provided in the host device documentation. Please check the Intermec web site for additional documentation at www.intermec.com. Hereby, Intermec Technologies Corporation declares that this Bluetooth module is in compliance with the essential requirements and other relevant provisions of R&TTE Directive (1999/5/EC). This product has been assessed to the following standards:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 60950:1992 (incl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) PRELIMINARY DRAFT 3 The transmitter modules output power is 13.8 mW. The products using this module are intended for business and industrial environments. They should not be used in residential environments and by children. 0981 This product is marked with this logo and uses radio frequency bands that are harmonized throughout the European Community. The following table indicates the areas of intended use of the equipment and any known restrictions. Country of Intended Use Austria Belgium Cyprus Czech Republic Denmark Estonia Finland France Germany Greece Hungary Ireland Italy Lithuania Latvia Luxembourg Malta The Netherlands Poland Portugal Slovakia Slovenia Spain Sweden United Kingdom Yes X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X X License No Required Restrictions Details 4 PRELIMINARY DRAFT Restrictions Details Yes License No Required Country of Intended Use Other non-EU:
China Iceland Liechtenstein Norway Switzerland Japan Additional EMI/RFI Compliance This device meets the Class B limit requirements of CISPR 22. X X X X X X Pour les utilisateurs en dehors du Canada et des Etats-unis Veuillez placer ce supplment dans votre manuel. Le produit Intermec que vous avez achet peut transmettre et recevoir des donnes laide dun systme dtalement du spectre en bond de frquence de 2,4 GHz. Les informations de programmation et de configuration pour les metteurs-rcepteurs sont galement fournies dans la documentation de lappareil hte. Pour obtenir toute documentation supplmentaire, veuillez consulter le site web dIntermec, ladresse www.intermec.com. Par la prsente, Intermec Technologies Corporation dclare que ce Bluetooth radio est conforme aux exigences de base et autres exigences pertinentes de la Directive R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Ce produit a t valu par rapport aux normes suivantes:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 60950:1992 (comprenant lamendement 1-4, 11) La puissance de sortie du module metteur-rcepteur est de 13.8 mW. Les produits utilisant ce module sont destins des environnements commerciaux et industriels. Ils ne doivent pas tre utiliss dans des environnements rsidentiels et par des enfants. PRELIMINARY DRAFT 5 0981 Ce produit porte ce logo et utilise des bandes RF qui sont harmonises travers lUnion Europenne. Le tableau suivant rpertorie les zones dutilisation prvues pour lquipement et les restrictions connues. Pays dutilisation prvu Licence Oui Non requise Belgique France X X Restrictions Dtails Conformit additionnelle la norme EMI/RFI Cet appareil respecte les limites imposes pour la Classe B par le CISPR 22. Fr Benutzer auerhalb von Kanada und den Vereinigten Staaten Legen Sie diese Ergnzung in Ihr Handbuch. Das Intermec-Produkt, das Sie gekauft haben, sendet und empfngt Daten mit Hilfe eines 2,4-GHz-Frequenzsprung-
Spreizspektrumsystems. Dieses Produkt bermittelt elektromagnetische Wellen in einem Frequenzbereich von 2,4 GHz. Es wurde getestet und in bereinstimmung mit U.S. (OET Anleitung 65) und kanadischen
(RSS 102) RF-Bestrahlungsvorschriften befunden. Zur Zeit gibt es in der EU keine Richtlinien, die diesen Produkttyp abdecken. In der Dokumentation des Hostgertes finden Sie auerdem Informationen zum Programmieren und Konfigurieren der Sende-
Empfangs-Gerte. Weitere Hinweise erhalten Sie auf der Intermec-
Website unter www.intermec.com. Hiermit erklrt Intermec Technologies Corporation, dass das Bluetooth Radio mit den wesentlichen Anforderungen und anderen sachdienlichen Vorschriften der R&TTE-Richtlinie (1999/5/EC) bereinstimmt. Dieses Produkt wurde gem der folgenden Normen bewertet:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08) 6 PRELIMINARY DRAFT
EN 60950:1992 (einschl. Amdt. 1-4, 11) Die Ausgangsleistung des Sende-Empfangs-Moduls betrgt 13.8 mW. Die Produkte, die dieses Modul verwenden, sind fr geschftliche und industrielle Umgebungen gedacht. Sie sollten nicht in Wohngegenden und in der Nhe von Kindern verwendet werden. 0981 Das Produkt ist mit diesem Markenzeichen versehen und verwendet Radiofrequenzbreiten, die in der Europischen Gemeinschaft berall aufeinander abgestimmt sind. Zustzliche Elektromagnetische Strung-bereinstimmung Dieses Gert entspricht den Grenzbestimmungen der Klasse B von CISPR 22. Per gli utenti al di fuori del Canada o degli Stati Uniti Si prega di collocare questo supplemento nel manuale per la configurazione senza la radio. Il prodotto Intermec che avete acquistato trasmette e riceve i dati tramite un sistema a 2,4 GHz che utilizza la tecnologia FHSS (salto di frequenze, spettro esteso). La documentazione del dispositivo host fornisce inoltre le informazioni sulla programmazione e la configurazione dei transceiver. Per altre informazioni, consultate il sito web Intermec allindirizzo www.intermec.com. Con la presente Intermec Technologies Corporation dichiara che questo Bluetooth radio conforme ai requisiti essenziali e alle altre clausole importanti della direttiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Questo prodotto stato valutato in base ai seguenti standard:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 60950:1992 (incluso Amdt. 1-4, 11) La potenza di uscita del modulo trasmittente di 13.8 mW. I prodotti che utilizzano questo modulo sono destinati ad ambienti industriali e commerciali e non debbono essere utilizzati in ambienti residenziali e dai bambini. PRELIMINARY DRAFT 7 0981 Questo prodotto reca il presente logo e utilizza bande di radiofrequenza armonizzate nellambito della Comunit Europea. Ulteriore conformit con EMI/RFI Questo dispositivo conforme ai limiti stabiliti in CISPR 22 per la Classe B. Para Usuarios Fuera de Canada o de los Estados Unidos Por favor, coloque este suplemento dentro de su manual. Este producto de Intermec transmite y recibe datos por medio de un sistema de espectro ensanchado en lupulizacin de frecuencia de 2,4 GHz. Para obtener informacin sobre la configuracin y programacin del transceptor, consulte la documentacin provista con el dispositivo host. Para obtener documentacin adicional, visite el sitio web de Intermec: www.intermec.com. Por la presente, Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que el Bluetooth radio cumple con los requisitos esenciales de acuerdo con la directiva (1999/5/EC) de R&TTE. Este producto ha sido evaluado de acuerdo con los siguientes estndares o normas:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 60950:1992 (incl. Enmienda 1-4, 11) La potencia de salida del mdulo transmisor es de 13.8 mW. Los productos que usan este mdulo estn destinados para uso en ambientes comerciales e industriales. No deben ser usados en ambientes residenciales o en la proximidad de nios. 0981 Este producto est marcado con este logotipo y utiliza bandas de radiofrecuencia armonizadas en toda la Comunidad Europea. Conformidad adicional con EMI/RFI Este dispositivo cumple con los lmites requeridos para la Clase B de CISPR 22. 8 PRELIMINARY DRAFT Para Usurios Fora do Canad ou dos Estados Unidos Coloque este suplemento no seu manual. O produto Intermec que voc comprou transmite e recebe dados usando um sistema FHSS (Espectro de Difuso de Seqncia Hopping) de 2,4 GHz . As informaes sobre programao e configurao dos transceptores tambm so fornecidas na documentao do dispositivo hospedeiro. Consulte tambm o site da Intermec na web, no endereo www.intermec.com, para documentao complementar. Por este documento, a Intermec Technologies Corporation declara que o Bluetooth radio atende aos requisitos essenciais e outras condies relevantes da Diretiva R&TTE (1999/5/EC). Esse produto foi avaliado em relao aos seguintes padres:
ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12)
ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
EN 60950:1992 (includa Amdt. 1-4, 11) A potncia de sada do mdulo transmissor de 13.8 mW. Os produtos que usam este mdulo so destinados aos ambientes comerciais e industriais. Eles no devem ser utilizados em ambientes residenciais e por crianas. 0981 Este produto identificado por esta logomarca e utiliza bandas de freqncia de rdio que esto harmonizadas na Comunidade Europia. Conformidades EMI/RFI Adicionais Este produto atende aos requisitos de limite Classe B do CISPR22. PRELIMINARY DRAFT 9 ETSI EN 300 328-2 v1.2.1 (2001-12) ETSI EN 301 489-17 v1.2.1 (2002-08)
13.8 0981 10 PRELIMINARY DRAFT PRELIMINARY DRAFT 11 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2004 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. Important BTM311 Bluetooth Radio Information!
*074476-001*
P/N 074476-001
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual part 1 | Users Manual | 2.26 MiB | January 05 2008 |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior noticed and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2008 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. ii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin . xii Safety Information . xii Global Services and Support. xiii Warranty Information. xiii Web Support. xiii Telephone Support . xiii Service Location Support . xiv Who Should Read This Document . xiv Related Documents . xiv Patent Information . xv 1 Using the Printer . 1 Learning About the Printer Models. 2 Guidelines for Operating the Printer . 3 Understanding the Control Panel . 3 Using the Reset Button . 4 Understanding the Power Supply Options . 6 Using the Internal Battery. 6 Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply. 6 Connecting to a DC Power Source . 7 Fixed Mount Printer . 7 Portable Printer. 7 2 Installing the Printer . 9 Installing the Internal Battery . 10 Installing the Ribbon Cartridge. 11 Adjusting the Printhead Gap . 12 Loading the Paper Tray . 13 Loading Paper in the Printer . 13 Positioning the Paper . 13 Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders . 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual iii Contents Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder . 16 3 Maintaining the Printer . 19 Cleaning the Printer Case . 20 Cleaning the Outside of the Case . 20 Cleaning the Inside the Case. 21 Cleaning the Printer Ribbon . 21 Cleaning the Mask Spring. 22 4 Configuring the Printer . 25 Connecting to the Printer. 26 Understanding the Font Modules . 27 Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility . 28 Installing the Configuration Files . 28 Generating Custom Configuration Files . 29 Understanding the Printer Configuration . 29 Selecting an International Font. 34 Selecting Parameters . 37 Saving Files to the Printer . 40 Default Printer Settings. 41 Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility. 42 Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility . 42 Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections . 46 Operating the Printer Configuration Utility . 46 Communicating with the Printer. 47 Setting the 6822 Configuration . 49 Default Printer Settings. 53 Error Messages . 54 Timeout Error . 54 Port Not Found Error . 54 Access Denied Error. 54 Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter . 54 5 Control Code Definitions . 57 Understanding Control Code Definitions . 58 I/O Buffer . 58 iv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Print Image Buffer . 58 Special Notations . 58 Using Printer Control Codes . 59 Backspace . 59 Beeper . 59 Cancel Line . 60 Carriage Return. 60 Delete . 60 Form Feed . 61 Select Half-Speed Printing . 61 Cancel Half-Speed Printing . 61 Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode . 61 Line Feed . 62 Perform Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Line Feed . 62 Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed . 62 Perform Master Reset . 62 Set Print Position (absolute) . 63 Set Print Position (relative). 63 Select Top-Down Printing . 64 Select Bottom-Up Printing . 64 Select Unidirectional Printing . 64 Cancel Unidirectional Printing. 64 Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing . 65 Page Formatting Functions . 65 Set Page Length (lines). 65 Set Page Length (inches) . 66 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) . 66 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing . 66 Select n/216-inch Line Spacing . 67 Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) . 67 Set Right Margin . 67 Set Left Margin. 68 Set Skip Over Perforation. 68 Cancel Skip Over Perforation. 69 Character Style and Text Mode Functions . 69 Select Condensed Mode (compressed). 69 Cancel Condensed Mode . 70 Select Double-Strike Mode . 70 Cancel Double-Strike Mode. 70 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Print . 71 Select Double-Wide Mode . 71 Cancel Double-Wide Mode . 72 Select Elite Pitch. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual v Contents Select Emphasized Print Mode. 72 Cancel Emphasized Print Mode . 73 Defining Intercharacter Space . 73 Select Italic Mode. 73 Cancel Italic Mode . 74 Master Select . 74 Select Pica Pitch . 75 Select Superscript Mode. 76 Select Subscript Mode . 76 Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode . 76 Select Underline Mode. 77 Cancel Underline Mode . 77 Tabs and Tab Setting Functions . 77 Perform Horizontal Tab . 78 Set Horizontal Tabs . 78 Clear Horizontal Tabs. 79 Perform Vertical Tab . 79 Set Vertical Tabs . 79 Clear Vertical Tabs. 80 Set Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel . 80 Select Vertical Tab Channel. 81 Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions . 81 Single-Byte Character Sets. 81 Double-Byte Character Sets . 82 Multi-Byte Character Sets . 82 Select National Character Set. 83 Hebrew Character Fonts. 84 User Defined Characters. 85 Copy ROM to RAM . 86 Define User-Defined Characters . 86 Select User-Defined Character Set. 87 Select Default Character Set. 87 Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 . 88 Expand Printable Code Area . 88 Enable Printing of Character Graphics. 89 Disable Printing of Character Graphics . 90 Printing Character Graphics . 90 Graphics Functions . 91 Select Graphics Mode. 92 Reassign Graphics Mode . 92 Select Single Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode. 93 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode . 93 Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode . 94 Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode . 94 vi 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode. 95 6 Troubleshooting . 97 Checking the Power Source . 98 Contents Aligning the Printer Mechanism . 98 Troubleshooting System Components. 100 Verifying the Printer Components . 100 Power Source Verification . 100 Communications / Host Computer Verification. 101 Understanding Printer Errors . 102 Runtime Errors . 102 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors . 103 Fatal Errors . 104 Self-Test Function Descriptions . 105 Detailed Printer Self-Test . 106 Self-Test Report . 106 Understanding the Self-Test Report . 107 Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips . 111 Compatibility Issues . 114 Understanding Diagnostic Information. 114 Communications Pin-Out Configurations. 119 A Specifications . 125 Specifications . 126 Printer Dimensions . 127 Fixed Mount Printer . 127 Portable Printer . 128 Media Specifications. 128 Material Breakdown . 129 Caliper Breakdown . 130 Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout. 131 B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications. 133 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual vii Contents Using Configuration Commands. 134 Operating Modes. 135 Command and Control Modes . 136 Set Local Bluetooth Device Name . 137 Set Class of Device/Service Field . 137 Set Service Name . 137 Connectable On/Off . 137 Specify Page Scan Timing . 138 Enable Discoverable. 138 Specify Inquiry Scan Timing . 138 Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE . 139 Manage Security Modes. 139 Read Module Version. 140 Read Local Device Address . 140 Set Shutdown Timing. 141 Clear Link Key Table . 141 Understanding Adapter States or Modes. 141 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through . 143 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface 143 Power Management Flow Diagram. 144 Radio Power On/Off Mechanism . 145 Persistent Storage . 145 System Behavior/Software Considerations . 145 Remote Configuration. 146 Bluetooth Performance . 147 Diagnostics Capabilities . 147 Applications . 148 System Qualification. 149 Operation Resilience. 149 Environmental Specifications . 149 Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements. 150 Default Configuration . 152 C Cross-Reference Tables . 153 Control Codes and Escape Sequences. 154 Single Character Control Code Definitions . 170 viii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Contents Escape Sequence Quick Reference . 173 Factory-Installed Printer Defaults . 175 D Printer Font Test Jobs. 179 About the Printer Font Jobs. 180 Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set. 180 Simplified Chinese Character Set . 181 IBM 437 Code Page Character Set . 181 Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set . 181 Korean Character Set . 182 International Character Set . 182 I Index . 183 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons which tell you when to follow ESD procedures. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. This icon appears at the beginning of any procedure in this manual that could cause you to touch components (such as printed circuit boards) that are susceptible to damage from electrostatic discharge (ESD). When you see this icon, you must follow standard ESD guidelines to avoid damaging the equipment you are using. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. x 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Global Services and Support Before You Begin Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service & Support > Warranty. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec. Services Order Intermec products Order Intermec media Order spare parts Technical Support Service Service contracts Description Place an order. Ask about an existing order. Order printer labels and ribbons. Order spare parts. Talk to technical support about your Intermec product. Get a return authorization number for authorized service center repair. Request an on-site repair technician. Renew a contract, ask about an existing contract. In the USA and Canada call 1-800-
755-5505 and choose this option 1 and then choose 2 1 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 4 2 and then choose 2 2 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 3 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xi Before You Begin Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. Service Location Support For the most current listing of service locations, click Support >
Returns and Repairs > Repair Locations. For technical support in South Korea, use the after service locations listed below:
AWOO Systems 102-1304 SK Ventium 522 Dangjung-dong Gunpo-si, Gyeonggi-do Korea, South 435-776 Contact: Mr. Sinbum Kang Telephone: +82-31-436-1191 Email: sbkang@awoo.co.kr Sammi Information Systems Co Ltd 7-9FL, Seo Jo Building 103-15, Galwor-Dong Seoul, Yong San-ku Korea, South 140-807 Contact: Kyung-Hee Koo Telephone: +82-2-790-5508 Email: jlovekoo@sammicomputer.co.kr Who Should Read This Document This users guide is for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the 6822 printer. This users guide provides you with information about the features of the 6822 printer, and how to install, configure, operate, maintain, and troubleshoot them. Related Documents The Intermec web site contains Intermec documents (in PDF) that you can download for free. To download documents 1 Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. xii 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Before You Begin 2 Click Support > Manuals. 3 In the Select a Product field, choose the product whose documentation you want to download. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Patent Information This product is protected by one or more of the following United States patents:
5,581,293; 5,613,790; 5,927,876; 6,088,049; 6,345,920 There may be U.S. and Foreign Patents Pending. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual xiii Before You Begin xiv 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Using the Printer Use this chapter to familiarize yourself with the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Learning about the printer models Guidelines for operating the printer Understanding the control panel Understanding the power supply options 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Learning About the Printer Models The 6822 printer is used in the route accounting industry to produce high-quality customer invoices, receipts, load reports, transfers, and other documents. A unique sleep feature saves energy when the printer is not printing, eliminating the need for an ON/OFF switch. Data input is normally provided by hand-held or mobile computers. The 6822 printer is available in the following models:
Fixed Mount Printer The fixed mount printer is mounted in motor vehicles or used in a settlement room. The terminal holder may be mounted on the printer or a remote dock can connect to the side of the printer. A deep paper tray, which holds up to 200 3-ply forms (up to 5 cm or 2 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Portable Printer The portable printer has a handle so that you can carry it. An optional internal battery permits operation without the use of an external power source. The terminal holder is an integral part of this printer. A shallow paper tray, which holds up to 50 3-ply forms (up to 2.5 cm or 1.0 in of paper) is located under the printer mechanism. Note: The printer models are shown on page 8. The discharge of electrostatic energy accumulated on the human body, clothing, or other surfaces can damage or destroy the printhead or electronic components used in this printer. Avoid touching the electrical connectors while unpacking or setting up your printer. 2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Guidelines for Operating the Printer Chapter 1 Using the Printer Make sure that you mobile computer remains connected to the printer when printing or operating. Keep the printer cover closed except during maintenance or when loading paper. Make sure the paper is properly installed in the paper tray or dashboard mount. Disconnect the printer power cable when jump-starting the vehicle. Make sure your printer is loaded with paper before communicating with your mobile computer. Do not spill liquids or food crumbs into the printer. Do not use solvents or abrasive cleaners on the printer. Do not rest objects on, under, or against the printer. If the printer is attached to a vehicle electrical system, do not start or stop the vehicle engine while printing. Do not overload the paper tray or paper jams will occur. Understanding the Control Panel The printer control panel has four status indicators in the top row and three buttons in the bottom row. Three indicators blink when there is a problem. The three buttons adjust and align the paper. Understanding the Status Indicators Description Indicator Description Paper Out The printer is out of paper. Head Jam Low Battery The printhead is jammed and cannot move. The internal battery voltage, the vehicle battery voltage, or the power module voltage is too low. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Status Indicators (continued) Description Indicator Description Power The power LED turns green when you press any button and goes off after ten seconds. The LED also goes on when:
the printer is attached to an external power supply the printer is using the internal battery and the battery charge is low a print job is sent to the printer you perform a power-on-self-test Understanding How to Use the 6822 Buttons Name Form Feed Button Set Page Line Feed FORM FEED SET PAGE LINE FEED Function Press this button to feed the paper into the printer mechanism or when the printer should advance to the next form. If the printer ran out of paper, press this button to initiate automatic paper loading. Press this button to signal the beginning of the page to the printer after you have made the appropriate paper adjustments;
or to set the line feed counter to zero and move the printhead to its home position. Press this button to clear a Paper Out error so printing can resume. Press this button to adjust the top of the paper to the next line. Note: All printer covers are hinged to the printer. These hinges have a tension screw (turn clockwise to tighten, turn counterclockwise to loosen), should you need to adjust them. Using the Reset Button Use the printer reset button to:
reset a printer that is unresponsive and apparently locked up 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the Printer force a synchronization between the printer and a connected PC when sending control codes restart the printer for any reason Note: The reset button does not reset a connected Bluetooth module as it is powered from a different power source. Both the fixed mount printer and the portable printer have a reset button on the left-hand side of the raised printer mechanism. See the following illustration for the location of the reset button. Reset button Fixed mount and portable printer reset button 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the Printer Understanding the Power Supply Options The following power supply options are available for the 6822s. Using the Internal Battery The internal battery (P/N 317-075-001) allows the portable printer and some fixed mount printers to operate independently of other power sources. The 6822 discharges the internal battery even when the printer is not is use. Over time, the internal battery can discharge to the point where the battery is not recoverable. Plug the printer into an external charge source or disconnect the battery when you store the printer for any length of time. A total discharge of the battery is most likely to occur when the battery is new and the battery chemical reactions are not fully formed, or the battery has had only one charge cycle. Connecting to a Vehicle Power Supply You will need to order a printer installation kit to install the 6822 printer in a vehicle. The following kits are available:
P/N 203-242-101 (fixed mount printers) P/N 203-242-102 (portable printers). The installation kits contain all of the hardware (nuts, bolts, washers, a terminal ring, and a fuse link) for connecting the battery cable directly to the vehicle battery. These kits also contain adjustable wire clamps to secure the cable in place. Note: The 6820 printer and associated electrical wiring should be installed under the supervision of properly trained and qualified personnel. See the 6820 Printer Installation Instructions (P/N 931-052-001) to learn how to connect the printer to a vehicle power supply. 6 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Connecting to a DC Power Source Chapter 1 Using the Printer Each printer has a dc power jack that connects the printer to a power source, such as the vehicle battery or an external power supply. Each printer communicates with a mobile computer through the mobile computer socket (in terminal holder, remote terminal holder, or vehicle dock). Fixed Mount Printer The dc power connector is on the bottom rear of the printer behind the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is in either the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. Portable Printer The dc power connector is on the side of the printer beneath the printer terminal holder. The data communications socket is either in the printer terminal holder or a separate vehicle dock. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the Printer DC Power connector Mobile computer socket Fixed Mount Printer Mobile computer socket DC Power connector Portable Printer 6822 Printer Models 8 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 2 Installing the Printer Installing the internal battery Installing the ribbon cartridge This chapter provides instructions how to set up the 6822 printer for the first time. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Adjusting the printhead gap Loading the paper tray Loading paper in the printer Inserting a computer in the terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 9 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Installing the Internal Battery The optional internal battery is primarily for portable printers. The battery can go in some fixed mount printers using a cable and a factory-
installed adapter. The printer battery recharges automatically when the printer is connected to an external power source. For most installations, the external power source is passed through the printer to the mobile computer. The printer battery does not provide charge to the computer. Note: Remove the printer battery when storing a printer for more than 30 days. After storage, reinstall the battery and connect the printer to an external power source for at least 14 hours to recharge the battery. To install the internal battery 1 Unlatch and open the printer mechanism. 2 Lower the battery into the rear of the printer case, as shown. 3 Attach the battery cable to the battery. 4 Push the battery down and back under the back edge of the case. The battery should snap into place. 5 Close and latch the mechanism. Battery Battery cable Printer mechanism Installing the internal battery 10 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Installing the Ribbon Cartridge Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Make sure there is a ribbon cartridge in the printer before you print and that the ribbon is fully seated (the cartridge makes a distinct snap or click when properly seated) with the visible portion of the ribbon straight and even. To install the ribbon cartridge 1 Turn the ribbon advance knob (in the direction of the raised arrows) to remove any slack in the ribbon. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tab into the cartridge, then lower the cartridge over the printhead. 3 Lower the tab side of the cartridge until it clicks. 4 Release the tab and press down on the arrow to fully seat the ribbon cartridge (tab clicks outward). 5 Turn the ribbon advance knob (follow raised arrows) to align the ribbon in the front of the printhead. Ribbon Locking tab Advance knob Tighten ribbon Installing the ribbon cartridge 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 11 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Adjusting the Printhead Gap The head gap adjuster is near the printer mechanism on the side opposite the green thumb wheel. The printhead adjuster has five notches between the printhead and the platen for different paper thicknesses. Verify the thickness of the paper loaded into the printer. To adjust the printhead gap If you are using single-sheet forms, set the head gap adjuster to the third notch away from the paper. If you are using multiple-sheet forms (2-ply or 3-ply), set the head gap adjuster to the fourth notch away from the paper. If you experience frequent head jams, set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper. This may stop the head jams. If the 2-ply and 3-ply paper have light printing, setting the gap adjuster to a closer setting will darken the print. 1 5 Adjusting the printhead 12 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Loading the Paper Tray Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: Do not exceed the recommended amounts of paper quantity or thickness. When loading multiple-sheet paper, be sure to have the original faced up, with the leading edge towards the rear of the printer. To load the paper tray in fixed mount and portable printers 1 Unlatch and raise the printer mechanism. 2 Lower a stack of paper, with the original faced up, into the paper tray under the printer mechanism. The fixed mount printer holds up to 200 3-ply forms about 5 cm
(2 in) thick. The portable printer holds up to 50 3-ply forms about 2.5 cm (1 in) thick. 3 Pull the top form out and over the rear of the printer mechanism. Lower and latch the printer mechanism. To load paper from the flat paper tray 1 Hold a stack of paper, up to 6 cm (2.5 in) thick, with the original facing you, and lay the stack flat into the tray. 2 Pull the top form out to load into the printer. Loading Paper in the Printer Follow these steps to load the paper into the printer, or paper jams may occur. Positioning the Paper Paper for the 6822 has perforated strips that fit onto the pinfeed holder pins, guiding the paper into the printer. This paper is sold separately in 1, 2, or 3-ply forms. To position the paper 1 Open the pinfeed holders outward. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 13 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Take the top edge of the sheet of paper and position it, original side facing down, over the pinfeed holder pins. 3 Align the first few holes of the paper, on each side of the paper, onto the pinfeed holder pins. 4 Close the pinfeed holders. 5 Raise the paper bail. 1 3 4 2 5 Positioning the paper Adjusting the Pinfeed Holders Note: There are two pinfeed holders, one next to the green thumb wheel and one opposite the same wheel. Always loosen the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. Note: Adjusting the pinfeed holder next to the green thumb wheel may cause information to print in the wrong place. If this pinfeed holder is moved, correct its location by releasing the pinfeed holder tab, moving the pinfeed holder as close to the green thumb wheel as possible, then locking the pinfeed holder tab, before adjusting the opposite pinfeed holder. To adjust the pinfeed holders 1 With the pinfeed holders open, release the locking tab on the pinfeed holder opposite the green thumb wheel. 14 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 2 Adjust the pinfeed holder position so that the pins align with the paper. 3 Close the pinfeed holder. 4 Ensure that the paper is smooth (no folds, bulges, bows, etc.) between the pinfeed holders. If so, push the locking tab down on the pinfeed holder that you adjusted. Pinfeed holder Locked pinfeed holder locking tab Released pinfeed holder locking tab Thumbwheel
(green) Adjusting the pin feed holders To feed paper into the printer 1 Press Form Feed button to feed the paper into the printer. 2 Lower the paper bail. An empty printer autofeeds new paper approximately 0.25 cm (0.1 in) beyond the top of the paper bail. Note: The ideal distance to feed paper beyond the paper bail may vary due to environmental conditions (such as humidity) and specific aspects of certain paper. Use the green thumb wheel to position the paper to a desired distance according to your conditions. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 15 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Note: If your paper has a preprinted logo on every page, make sure the printhead is below the preprinted logo. If not, you can adjust the position of the paper, either by pressing the Line Feed button, or by using the green thumb wheel. 3 Once the paper is properly positioned, press the Set Page button to clear the Paper Out light and indicate where the top of the page is. 4 Close the printer lid. Make sure the paper passes through the paper slot when the printer begins to print. Inserting a Computer in the Terminal Holder Note: When removing the computer, do not press the computer keys against the terminal slide retainer. Always store the computer in the terminal holder. The fixed mount or portable printers have terminal holder options for the 4000 Series, 61XX, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, CK60, and the CN3 computers. To insert a 4000 series or a 62XX in the terminal holder 1 Insert the bottom of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide retainer and make room for the computer. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the printer docking connector. To insert a 61XX, a 600 Series, a 700 Series, CK60, or a CN3 in a terminal holder 1 Insert the top of the computer into the terminal slide retainer. 2 Use the computer to push the terminal slide all the way in the direction shown. 3 Lower the connector end of the computer into the terminal holder. 16 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Slide the computer to fully seat it in the docking connector. Chapter 2 Installing the Printer Inserting a computer in a terminal holder 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 17 Chapter 2 Installing the Printer 18 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 3 Maintaining the Printer Use this chapter maintain your 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Cleaning the printer case Cleaning the printer ribbon Cleaning the mask spring 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 19 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Printer Case Periodic cleaning helps maintain the appearance and reliability of the printer. When cleaning the printer, inspect both the outside and the inside for signs of damage or wear. Glass cleaners containing ammonia will cause permanent damage to the printer cover. Do not use abrasives or solvents (acetone, ketone, toluene, or xylene) to clean any part of the printer or permanent damage to the printer will occur. Note: MICRO-CLEAN II is the only cleaner recommended for the printer case. Other cleaners can damage the printer case. Note: GUIDE SHAFT CLEANER is recommended for cleaning your 80-column printer guide shafts. Cleaning the printer guide shaft can reduce the number of head jams caused by dirt and buildup. Note: Both cleaners are sold separately. Cleaning the Outside of the Case Do not pour liquid cleaners directly on the printer case. Instead, dampen a soft, lint-free cloth with a quality cleaner and clean the exterior surfaces with this cloth. Do not use solvent solutions. Inspect the DC power jack, all cables, and the remote terminal holder or vehicle dock for damage. 20 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer Cleaning the Inside the Case Let the printer cool before you clean the inside of the printer or you may burn your fingers. Open the printer cover and inspect the ribbon cartridge and all visible moving parts on the printer mechanism for signs of wear or damage. Pinfeed holder Thumbwheel
(green) Paper bail Ribbon cartridge Moving parts in the printer mechanism Use a low-pressure, dry air source, such as canned air, or a vacuum, to remove accumulated paper dust from the printer mechanism. Head gap adjuster Cleaning the Printer Ribbon The printer ribbon contains a special lubricant to ensure that the fine dot wires inside the printhead receive adequate lubrication. Replace the ribbon frequently to prolong the life of the printhead. The printer requires no additional lubrication. To remove the ribbon cartridge 1 Move the printhead mechanism to an open area. 2 Squeeze the ribbon cartridge locking tabs (on the side of the cartridge) against the ribbon cartridge. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 21 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 3 Lift the ribbon cartridge to remove the ribbon from the printhead. Make sure the ribbon does not catch or get sticky. 4 Lift the ribbon cartridge out of the printer. Cleaning the Mask Spring Check the mask spring behind the printhead.If the mask spring appears to be in good condition, install a new ribbon cartridge. If the mask spring is dirty, clean it as described below. To clean the mask spring 1 Unlatch the printhead locking tabs to release the printhead, lift the printhead aside, then lift up the paper bail. Do not detach the printhead unit. Never use a sharp object to clean between the printhead and the platen (rubber roller). This can damage the mask spring and printhead. 2 Remove the clear plastic paper guide that seats the mask spring, if necessary. Use your fingernails to loosen the base of the paper guide, then pull the paper guide straight up from the printer mechanism. 3 Remove the metal mask spring from the paper guide and clean with a quality cleaner. Replace if damaged. 4 Insert the mask spring in the paper guide and install the paper guide into the printer. 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 5 Close the paper bail, reinsert the printhead, latch the two printhead locking tabs, and install the ribbon. Print head locking tabs Print head lifted aside Mask spring Cleaning the mask spring Raised paper bail 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 23 Chapter 3 Maintaining the Printer 24 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual part 2 | Users Manual | 2.47 MiB | January 05 2008 |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 4 Configuring the Printer A Printer Configuration Utility is used to load font on the printer and to change the printer settings. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Connecting to the printer Understanding the font modules Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility 25 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Connecting to the Printer Connect your printer to your desktop computer using a serial cable
(P/N 226-270-001). The serial COM port connector on either the fixed mount printer or portable printer is on your printer mechanism, the same side as the green thumb wheel. Before connecting to your PC, locate and disconnect the gray terminal holder ribbon cable connector from the floor of the printer cavity. The cable is located behind the printer mechanism on the same side as the green thumb wheel and is the one that is not attached to the printer mechanism. Disconnect this terminal holder ribbon cable from the floor of the printer cavity Ignore this cable attached to the printer mechanism Intermec provides printer configuration utilities for the following Windows operating systems. If your PC has either Windows 95 or Windows 98, go to page 27 for instructions. If your PC has Windows 2000 or Windows XP, go to page 42. Understanding the Font Modules Intermec provides the following font modules for your 6822:
nft00000.mod Default International, 4820 compatible nft00437.mod IBM/Microsoft compatible Code Page 437 nft00932.mod JIS Japanese nft00936.mod GB2312 Chinese Simplified nft00949.mod KSC5601 Korean 26 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer nft00950.mod Big 5 Traditional Chinese Note: There are three versions of the default font module
(nft0000.mod): Arabic, Turkish, and International. Any one version of this module, but not all three versions, can appear in the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory and install on the 6822. The International version of this font module is automatically placed in the FONTS directory when the Printer Configuration Utility is installed on the PC. All three versions are included on the printer toolkit CD:
The Arabic version is included in the Default Fonts\Arabic directory. The Turkish version is in the Default Fonts\Turkish directory. The International version is in the Default Fonts\International directory. Use the Printer Configuration Utility to replace the existing default font module (nft00000.mod) with any of the of the other provided fonts. The Printer Configuration Utility is provided in the 6820 Tool Kit. Instructions for installing fonts are provided later in this chapter. For Windows 95 and Windows 98 Users If the default installation process was followed, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at 6820PRTR\TOOLKIT\FONTS where 6820PRTR is replaced by the actual directory in which you chose to extract the files. For Windows 2000 and Windows XP Users If you followed the default installation process, the Printer Configuration Utility FONTS directory is located at Program Files\Intermec\6820 Printer Configuration Utility\FONTS. Do not rename the font files in the FONTS directory. If rename the fonts will not work correctly. Using the Windows 95 or Windows 98 Printer Configuration Utility 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 27 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 95 or Windows 98 operating systems. Installing the Configuration Files Configuration files for the 6822 are located in the toolkit CD
(P/N 215-270-001), these include the rpgpconf.exe Printer Configuration Utility program and the rpgpconf.ini initialization file. The Printer Configuration Utility uses the initialization file to specify the location and names of font and printer control program folders. To set up your PC 1 Extract the toolkit files from the nptk6822.exe self-extracting archive file. 2 Create a directory, on your PC, with an appropriate name for the Printer Configuration Utility files. You could choose to have the files extracted at the root directory of your PC or specify another folder. Execute the self-extracting file from the target directory while specifying the path to nptk6822.exe in the command line. When you run nptk6822.exe, a TOOLKIT folder is created, as well the following folders:
DOS FONTS PCFS 6820SYS Generating Custom Configuration Files The Printer Configuration Utility also helps you create custom configuration files. These files have a .pcf file extension, and stored in the folder specified in the initialization file. See the default .pcf file in the PCFS folder for an example configuration file. Understanding the Printer Configuration A configuration consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and optionally, a printer control program. 28 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer When you start the Printer Configuration Utility, it creates a printer configuration. This configuration has no fonts, parameters are set to the default values, and there is no printer control program in memory. You can modify the basic printer configuration to meet your needs and load the custom configuration to your printer. Note: The working configuration is deleted when you exit the Printer Configuration Utility. To start the Printer Configuration Utility. 1 Run rpgconf.exe and click OK on the first screen to continue to the Main Menu. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 29 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 The following options are available on the Main Menu. Use Load Printer Configuration to load an existing configuration. Load either from a file or from the printer. Use Modify Printer Configuration to review or modify the working configuration, include the printer control program in the currently loaded configuration, or load fonts. Use Save Printer Configurations to save a configuration file to disk or download the working configuration to your 6822. Use Defaults to restore the printer to its default configuration. Note: When the Main Menu is first displayed, the Save Printer Configuration options are grayed out, prohibiting selection of those options until a configuration is loaded or modified. 3 Click Exit, then click Yes to exit the Printer Configuration Utility. Click No to the keep the Main Menu open. 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To load configuration files from your PC 1 Click From File to access the File, Open window. 2 Select a configuration file to load, then click OK. If the selected file does not exist, a File does not exist! error message appears. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. 3 If the file does exist, a warning message indicates that loading the selected file will overwrite your working configuration. Click OK to overwrite settings in working configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu. 4 OK, the configuration from the selected file is loaded into memory and becomes the current working configuration. If this load is 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 31 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer successful, a message similar to the one shown below is displayed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 5 If the working configuration is not replaced successfully with the configuration from the selected file, an error message appears indicating that the operation failed. Click OK to return to the Main Menu without loading a file. To load a configuration from the 6822 1 Click From Printer from the Main Menu to display a warning message that indicates that the printers configuration will overwrite the working configuration. 2 Click OK to overwrite the configuration, otherwise click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without loading the printers configuration. 3 If you click OK, a message is then displayed prompting you to reset the printer. If the connection is not successful, after approximately 20 seconds, the following message appears. 32 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 4 Click Yes, to retry connecting to the printer. 5 If you click No, an error message appears and indicates that the configuration was not loaded. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. 6 If a connection is established, no further action is required The Printer Configuration Utility communicates with the 6822 to find out the current settings and which font modules are loaded. The name, version, and size of the font modules are displayed on the Get From Printer screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 33 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To modify a printer configuration Use this option to view or change a working configuration, including adding fonts from disk (on the PC), deleting printer fonts, and changing parameters settings. Select Modify Printer Configuration to view or modify the printer configuration. To include the control program Use this option to include the printer control program when saving the working configuration to the printer. The npfl6822.mod control program only needs to be changed when a new version becomes available. Select the Include Control Program check box to add the control program the next time you save the printer configuration. Selecting an International Font A variety of different international fonts are also available in the toolkit for the 6822. To select a font Click Fonts from the Main Menu to access the Font Selection screen where you can perform operations related to font files. The Fonts Available list shows font files that are available on disk. The Fonts Selected list show fonts that are in the current printer configuration. 34 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Note: Save is grayed out, prohibiting that selection, until either new fonts are selected, or fonts are removed from the Fonts Selected list. To copy font files 1 Highlight the font files in the Fonts Available list. You can highlight several files at one time, using conventional Windows selection methods. Click Copy to copy those font files to the Fonts Selected list Note: If you attempt to copy fonts from the Fonts Available list when these fonts already exist in the Fonts Selected list, the following error message is displayed, once for each of the duplicate fonts (where the current font file name is listed in place of nft00000.mod). 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 35 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected list. If there are two or more duplicate fonts, the cycle repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the duplicate font files. To delete font files Delete fonts from the Fonts Selected list to increase available memory in the printer. Select the font names you want to delete from the Fonts Selected list, then click Erase to clear those names. The Space Selection box, below the Fonts Selected list, displays the space remaining in flash (in kilobytes), based on fonts currently selected. When this number is negative, it means the available space in flash is less that the size of the selected fonts. Delete some fonts before saving the rest. Fonts marked with an asterisk (*), in the Fonts Selected list, are currently in printer memory. To cancel changes Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without making any changes. If you have not made any changes to the Fonts Selected list, you return to the Main Menu. 36 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Selecting Parameters To select a parameter Click Parameters from the Main Menu to access the Parameters window where you can modify any of the parameters that are not grayed out. Default parameter values are marked with an asterisk (*). To modify parameter configurations Select parameters on the screen using your stylus. Note: If you are using Bluetooth communication, you must change from the Norand Portable Communications Protocol (NPCP) mode to the Epson DTR mode with the baud rate set to 19.2 K and the parity set to None. To save parameters Click Save to update the working configuration and return to the Main Menu. To cancel the operation Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without modifying any configuration parameters. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 37 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To save a printer configuration Click To File from the Main Menu to access the File Save As dialog. Specify the drive, directory, and filename for the printer configuration file. To specify a file name 1 Click the Alpha button, on either the File Open window or the File Save As window to open the keyboard onscreen for you to enter text. 2 Click Save to save the file name or click Cancel to exit without saving the text. The following confirmation message appears. 38 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Click OK to return to the previous window without the entered text, or click Cancel to continue using the alpha keyboard. To save the configuration to disk After you have selected the drive, directory, and file name, click OK to save the configuration file. If a file by the same name exists, the following confirmation message is displayed, informing you that if you continue it will overwrite the existing file. Click Cancel to return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. Click OK fto continue. The following information is displayed assuring you that the working configuration was successfully saved to disk. Click OK to return to the Main Menu. To cancel the Save to File operation From the File, Save As window, click Cancel to abort the Save to File operation and return to the Main Menu without saving the working configuration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 39 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Saving Files to the Printer Select the Save File to Printer option from the Main Menu, to send the working configuration to your 6822. When you select this option, the following warning message is displayed:
The message indicates the configuration will be copied into the 6822 flash memory and overwrite the current configuration. Click OK for the system to connect to the printer and transfer the configuration, or Cancel to return to the Main Menu without updating the printer. Connecting to the printer 1 After you click OK, a message appears informing you that the system is attempting to establish connection with the printer. 2 Connect a serial cable (P/N 226-270-001) between your PC and the printer. 3 Press the Reset button to reset the printer. 4 If the connection is not successful after approximately 20 seconds, the following message is appears. 5 Click Yes to retry making a connection to the printer. 40 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 If the configuration was not saved to the printer, the following error message appears. If the connection is successful, the following screen appears and the printer configuration is updated. The screen also displays the data transfer status. Default Printer Settings The following are the default settings used when you click Restore Defaults to Printer:
Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration Protocol Values Slash all zeros (zeros are printed with a slash) CR (carriage return at end of line without line feed) NPCP 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 41 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Default Printer Settings Settings Parity Bit Rate Values N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. Using the Windows 2000 or Windows XP Printer Configuration Utility These instructions apply to desktop computers running either Windows 2000 or Windows XP operating systems. Installing the Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility The Windows 2000/XP Printer Configuration Utility is provided on the 6822TKCD toolkit CD (P/N 235-145-001). To set up your PC to use the Printer Configuration Utility 1 Insert the toolkit CD in your PC. 2 From your desktop, use your Explorer application to view the contents of the toolkit CD. 42 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 Double-click the setup.exe executable file, then click Next from the Welcome screen to continue. 4 The printer configuration utility files are copied to the Program Files\Intermec\6822 Printer Configuration Utility folder. To install the files in a different folder, enter the path and folder name. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 43 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer You can also specify if everyone who uses the computer has access to the printer configuration files or limit access to yourself. 5 Click Disk Cost to see the amount of disk space required to install the Printer Configuration Utility. Click OK to close and return to the installation screens. 44 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 6 Click Next to verify installation, click Back to adjust the information on the previous screen, or click Cancel to exit the installation. 7 Installation Complete appears on the screen. Click Close to exit the installation program. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 45 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Disabling the Microsoft ActiveSync Serial Port Connections If you use Microsoft ActiveSync to connect to your computers, you need to disable the serial port connections before using the Printer Configuration Utility. To disable ActiveSync 1 In the ActiveSync application on your desktop, select File >
Connection Settings. 2 Clear Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. Operating the Printer Configuration Utility The Printer Configuration Utility consists of a list of fonts, some parameter settings, and a printer control program. When the Printer Configuration Utility is active, it holds a configuration clipboard in memory. Initially, this configuration has parameters set to their default values. Consider the contents of the configuration clipboard as temporary and lost when you exit from the utility. Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to view the current printer configuration. 46 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to change printer setting and send those settings to the printer. Click the Reset to Defaults button to reset the to the factory default printer configuration. To start the Printer Configuration Utility Click Start > Programs > Intermec > 6820 Printer Configuration Utility > PConfigApp.exe to start the Printer Configuration Utility. Communicating with the Printer You can use COM port 1, 2, or 3 to communicate with your printer. COM port 1 is the default selection, but if it is not available or is being used by another application, select another COM port. To communicate with the printer 1 Click either the Get 6820 Configuration or the Set 6820 Configuration button to open communications with the printer. The Opening COM Port x to printer . message appears in the text box when you initiate communications sith the printer. The x in the message indicates which COM port is being used. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 47 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 When the Press Reset on the printer message appears in the text box, press the Reset button on your printer. For the location of the Reset button on your printer, see Using the Reset Button on page 4 3 The Opening COM Port x to printer. Done. message indicates that communication between your PC and the printer has been established. Note: If Unable to open COM Port x to printer appears in the text box another software application may be using the selected COM port. Select another COM port or disable the software application using the COM port. See page 54 for more error messages. 48 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To view the settings on your 6822 1 Click the Get 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication. 2 The Getting printer parameters . message appears when the Printer Configuration Utility retrieves configuration information from the printer. 3 The message Getting printer parameters . Done appears after configuration information is retrieved. 4 Modify configuration settings or click OK to close the Printer Configuration Utility. Setting the 6822 Configuration To modify configuration settings 1 Make changes to the Configuration Clipboard or click the Reset to Defaults button to undo your selections and return them to their defaults. Note: When using a Bluetooth adapter you must select the DTR communications protocol and a bit rate of 19.2K. 2 Click the Set 6820 Configuration button to initiate communication with the printer. The Setting printer parameters . message appears when you initiate communication with the printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 49 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 3 The Setting printer parameters . Done message appears when configuration parameters are set. Note: The Unable to set printer parameters message indicates a dropped connection between your PC and your printer. 4 Click OK to close the utility and detach the serial cable. To update 6822 fonts or the 6822 control program Click the Fonts and Control button to update the fonts stored in your printer or to update the printer control program. The Fonts Available for Update list shows font files that are available. The Fonts Selected for Update list show fonts that are to be installed jon the printer. 50 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer To learn what fonts are currently installed on your printer Click the Get Printer Fonts button. The installed fonts appear in the text box in the bottom right corner of the dialog. To select font files Highlight the font files you want to download in the Fonts Available for Update list. Click the right arrow pointing to the Fonts Selected for Update list to copy the selected font files to this list. Below is a sample screen. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 51 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer If the fonts you select exceed the space available in printer memory, an error message appears. Click OK to close the error message and not copy the font to the Fonts Selected for Update list. If there are two or more fonts that exceed the space allowed, this message repeats until an error message is displayed for each of the font files that went over the space allowed. The Space Needed information shown beneath the Fonts Available for Update list indicates the total space required (in bytes) for all of the fonts in the list. The Space Remaining information listed below the Fonts Selected for Update list displays the space remaining in the printer, given the fonts in the Selected list. Click Update Printer to update the printer fonts and the control program depending on the options selected on the dialog. If the Selected list is empty and the Include control program update is not checked, a Nothing selected for update message appears in the text box. Formats the printer flash for font updates and writes new font files to the printer for any fonts in the Selected list. Click the top, right arrow to copy selected font files from the Fonts Available for Update list to the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click the bottom, left arrow to remove any selected files from the Fonts Selected for Update list. Click Update Printer to update the fonts in the printer with those in the Fonts Selected for Update list. The Update progress: bar indicates the progress as the control program or fonts are written to the printer. 52 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Check the Include program control update check box to include the printer control program when updating the printer. Note: You only need to update the control program when new versions of the control program are released. Default Printer Settings. Default Printer Settings Settings Zero Print Option Autofeed Configuration CR (carriage return at end of line without Value Print zeros without a slash Protocol Parity Bit Rate line feed) NPCP N/A (for NPCP) 19.2 K (19200) For other printer defaults, see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 53 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer Error Messages There are three instances when the 6822 may not connect to your PC. In the example error messages, an x indicates the assigned COM port number. Timeout Error The timeout error may occur due to either of these situations:
The printer was not reset in the time allowed. The COM port exists on the desktop computer but nothing is connected to the port. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Printer not reset within the time allowed or printer not connected to COM port x. Port Not Found Error The COM port does not exist. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. COM port x cannot be found. Access Denied Error The COM port exists but a connection with the 6822 is not established. The particular COM port is identified in the error message. Error Message Unable to open COM port x to printer. Access to COM port x is denied. Close applications using COM port x or try another port. Connecting to the Bluetooth Adapter If your 6822 has a Bluetooth adapter, be sure to connect this adapter after you finish reconfiguring the 6822 fonts and exit the Printer Configuration Utility (gray cable beneath the printer mechanism). To enable Microsoft ActiveSync serial port based connections 1 Start ActiveSync and select File > Connection Settings. 54 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 2 Check Allow USB connections and Allow connections to one of the following. 3 Click OK. 4 Close the ActiveSync application. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 55 Chapter 4 Configuring the Printer 56 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 5 Control Code Definitions This chapter contains a set of control code definitions and specifications for page layout for the 6822 printer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Understanding control code definitions Using printer control codes Understanding the fanfold paper page layout 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 57 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Understanding Control Code Definitions I/O Buffer All characters and control codes received by the printer are stored in this buffer. Characters and controls codes are read from this buffer and acted upon to form the print buffer. Characters are removed from the I/O buffer as they are processed. Print Image Buffer All characters go through this buffer on their way to the printed page. This buffer contains the graphic image of the dots to print, from which characters are rendered. It is cleared when its contents are printed. Special Notations The following information defines notations included in the format definitions of the escape sequences, throughout this section. Special Notations Notation
(0)
(1)
NUL Description Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be zero (and not the character 0). For example: Select Top-
Down Printing ESC US (0). Used in the ASCII column of any of the Format definitions, indicates that its value can only be one (and not the character 1). For example: Select Bottom-Up Printing ESC US (1). When a number (at the end of an escape sequence) is marked with an asterisk, then either the value corresponding to that number or the value of the string character can be used for that number. For example, if 1* is shown, then either the value (1), or the value of the string character
(decimal: 49, hex: 31) can be used. The NUL character is represented in the Dec column as 0, in the Hex column as 00, and in the ASCII column as NUL. 58 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Using Printer Control Codes Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions These control code definitions are organized by categories of functions. The following methods assist in locating control codes easily:
Alphabetically organized (complete list)refer to the Control Codes and Escape Sequences table on page 164. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (single character codes only)refer to the Single Character Control Code Definitions table on page 180. Locate the index for the control code, and turn directly to that page. Numeric order (complete list)refer to the Escape Sequence Quick Reference table on page 183 and look up control codes by their actual code values. Locate the index for the escape sequence, and turn directly to that page. The print buffer is emptied. The printhead is moved to the left one character space (using the current pitch). This can be performed to, but not beyond, the left margin setting. The backspace is ignored if justification of right, full, or centered is selected. Decimal 8 Hex 08 ASCII BS The backspace control code (BS) is not reliable when text contains different character pitches. For reliable backspacing, use the escape sequence (ESC \), Set Relative Print Position. The printer produces a beep lasting approximately 1/10 of a second Decimal 7 Hex 07 ASCII BEL Backspace Format Beeper Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 59 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Line All of the characters currently in the print buffer are discarded. Current print position is set to left margin. Text already printed cannot be canceled Format Decimal 24 Hex 18 ASCII CAN Carriage Return Repositions the printhead at the start of the print line (usually at the left margin), and repositions the pointer to the start of the print buffer, after printing all data in the buffer. Also, all of the one line functions are reset, such as bold, double-strike, double-wide, or unidirectional printing. Decimal 13 Hex 0D ASCII CR Note: You can add an automatic line feed with a configuration item. Deletes the last character in the print buffer. This functions only in left justification. Decimal 127 Hex 7F ASCII DEL Format Delete Format 60 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Prints the contents of the print buffer, clears the print buffer, and advances the paper to the top of the next page (Top of Form), according to the current page length setting. The carriage position is moved to the start of the line Form Feed Format Decimal 12 Hex 0C ASCII FF Select Half-Speed Printing Turns on half-speed mode to provide quiet printing, and more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Format Decimal 27 115 1*
Hex 1B 73 01*
ASCII ESC s 1*
Cancel Half-Speed Printing Turns off half-speed mode (factory default), and continues with normal speed printing. Format Decimal 27 115 0*
Hex 1B 73 00*
ASCII ESC s 0*
Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Sets the amount of time the printer waits before it goes into low-power mode. The factory default is 10 seconds. Format Decimal 27 122 n Hex 1B 7A n ASCII ESC z n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 61 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Line Feed Perform Line Feed Prints and then clears the contents of the print buffer, resets the character count to zero; and advances the printhead to the next print line, using the current spacing. The position of the carriage is not affected and a carriage return is not executed. Decimal 10 Hex 0A ASCII LF Perform n/216-inch Line Feed Advances the paper to n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 74 n Hex 1B 4A n ASCII ESC J n Perform n/216-inch Reverse Line Feed Reverses the line feed by n/216 of an inch. This does not affect subsequent line feeds. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 106 n Hex 1B 6A n ASCII ESC j n Format Format Format Perform Master Reset Initializes the printer and restores factory installed printer defaults, (see Factory-Installed Printer Defaults on page 175 for a complete list of settings that are initialized with this command). Format 62 Decimal 27 64 Hex 1B 40 ASCII ESC @
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Set Print Position (absolute) Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Moves the printhead to an absolute horizontal position on the paper. The distance is specified in dots from the left margin to the new print position
(at which subsequent characters are printed). Each dot represents 1/60 of an inch. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:
number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum position is 480. The previous contents of the current print buffer is printed. If the position specified moves the printhead outside the current margins, the command is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This command is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 36 n1 n2 Hex 1B 24 n1 n2 ASCII ESC $ n1 n2 Set Print Position (relative) Moves the printhead to a horizontal position on the paper, relative to the current printhead position. The distance specified is in dots. To determine n1 and n2, first calculate the displacement required in 1/120ths of an inch. If the displacement is to the left, subtract it from 65536. The values for n1 and n2 determine the distance, as follows:
number of dots = n1 + (n2 * 256) Maximum displacement is 960. If the position specified would place the printhead outside the current margins, this function is ignored and the previous setting remains in effect. This function is also ignored in right, center, and full justification modes. Format Decimal 27 92 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5C n1 n2 ASCII ESC \ n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 63 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Top-Down Printing Enables top-down printing (factory default). First page is printed first. Format Format Format Format Decimal 27 31 0 Hex 1B 1F 00 ASCII ESC US (0) Select Bottom-Up Printing Enables bottom-up printing. The last page is printed first. Decimal 27 31 1 Hex 1B 1F 01 ASCII ESC US (1) Select Unidirectional Printing Turns on unidirectional printing mode. Unidirectional printing moves the printhead from left-to-right only, allowing for more accurate print positioning during text mode printing. Decimal 27 85 1*
Hex 1B 55 01*
ASCII ESC U 1*
Cancel Unidirectional Printing Turns off unidirectional printing (factory default), allowing the printhead to print in both directions Decimal 27 85 0*
Hex 1B 55 00) ASCII ESC U 0*
64 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Unidirectional (one line) Printing Turns on unidirectional printing for the current line only. The contents of the print buffer is printed, and cleared before setting this mode. This allows more accurate print positioning during text mode printing, for the current line. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 3C ASCII ESC <
Page Formatting Functions This set of functions consists of control codes that change the formatting of the page. The page length (form length) and margin settings define the printable area on the page. These settings need to conform to the actual size of the paper used in the printer. The line spacing functions set the amount of space from one line to the next, for line feeds. The factory default is 1/6 inch (6 lines per inch). The page length, vertical tab, and skip over perforation functions are also dependent on the line spacing function. Set Page Length (lines) Sets the length of the paper in lines, where the range of n (number of lines) is 1-127 (default = 66). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Format Decimal 27 67 n Hex 1B 43 n ASCII ESC C n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 65 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Set Page Length (inches) Sets thee length of the paper in inches, where the range of n (number of inches) is 1-22 (default = 11). Keep in mind the line spacing and actual length of the paper when specifying this value, since this function is dependent on those parameters. Top-of-Form is reset to the current line and the Skip Over Perforation setting is canceled. Decimal 27 67 0 n Hex 1B 43 00 n ASCII ESC C NUL n Select 1/8-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing is set to 1/8 of an inch (8 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 48 Hex 1B 30 ASCII ESC 0 Select 7/72-inch Line Spacing (7 dots) Sets the line spacing to 7/72 of an inch (approximately 9.7 lines per inch), for subsequent lines. Decimal 27 49 Hex 1B 31 ASCII ESC 1 Select 1/6-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to 1/6 of an inch (6 lines per inch), for subsequent lines (factory default). 1/6 inch is equal to 12 dot spacing. Decimal 27 50 Hex 1B 32 ASCII ESC 2 Format Format Format Format 66 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select n/216-inch Line Spacing Sets the line spacing to n/216 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/216 inch is 1/3 the distance between pins of the printhead
(approximately 1/3 of a dot) and 27/216 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-255. Decimal 27 51 n Hex 1B 33 n ASCII ESC 33 n Select n/72-inch Line Spacing (n dots) Sets the line spacing to n/72 of an inch, for subsequent lines. A spacing of 1/72 inch (1 point in font size) is the distance between pins on the printhead (approximately 1 dot) and 9/72 is 8 lines per inch. Range of n is 0-85. Decimal 27 59 n Hex 1B 41 n ASCII ESC A n Set Right Margin Clears all text in the print buffer and sets the right margin to n columns, using the current character pitch. This is the number of the characters from column 1 (at the left edge of the paper) to the last column before the right margin (factory default = 80). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value for this is the maximum number of characters
(based on the current pitch) that would fit between the left margin and the right edge of the default printable area of the page. Ranges shown below could vary, depending on values of other parameters that affect character width. If the value specified is not within the allowed range, it is ignored. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 67 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Range of n is 2-80 in Pica mode, 2-96 in Elite mode, and 2-136 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 81 n Hex 1B 51 n ASCII ESC Q n Set Left Margin Clears the print buffer text and sets the left margin, relative to the number of columns to the left of the first column to print
(factory default = 0). Minimum space between margins is the width of one double-width pica character. Maximum value must be less than the right margin. Ranges shown below could vary, pending on other parameter values that affect character width. If the specified value is not within the range, it is ignored. Range of n is 0-78 in Pica mode; 0-93 in Elite mode, and 0-133 in Compressed mode. Decimal 27 108 n Hex 1B 6C n ASCII ESC l n Set Skip Over Perforation Defines the number of lines to skip between the last printed line on the page and the first printed line on the next page is set. If the value specified for this function is greater than the page length, it is ignored. This function is canceled by using one of the Set Page Length functions
(factory default = disabled). This function is valid for continuous paper only. The amount of space left blank at the bottom of the printed page is dependent upon the current Line Spacing. Decimal 27 78 n Hex 1B 4E n ASCII ESC N n 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format 68 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Skip Over Perforation Cancels the skip over perforation, which allows the maximum number of lines to print on each page. Format Decimal 27 79 Hex 1B 4F ASCII ESC O Character Style and Text Mode Functions The following set of functions affect the appearance of text on the printed page. This could involve size, typeface, or other characteristics of the text. Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Selects condensed mode which prints characters at approximately 60%
of the normal width. This results in character pitches, as shown below
(for exact pitch values, see Master Select on page 74). Character Pitches Condensed Mode 17 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Expanded 9 cpi (approximate) Condensed + Elite 20 cpi (approximate) This function empties the print buffer and turns compressed mode on, and stays on until canceled by Cancel Compressed Mode, ESC SI or DC2 (factory default = disabled). Note: This function is not supported in Double-Byte Character Sets (DBCS). Format Decimal 27 15 15 Hex 1B 0F 0F ASCII ESC SI SI 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 69 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Condensed Mode Cancels the compressed mode, enabled by Select Compressed Mode, SI or ESC SI (1). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 18 18 Hex 1B 12 12 ASCII DC2 DC2 Select Double-Strike Mode Enables double-strike printing, until Cancel Double-Strike Mode is encountered. Factory default disables double-strike. Text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly below the first dot. This mode is not available in NLQ, but is not canceled when you select NLQ. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 71 Hex 1B 47 ASCII ESC G Cancel Double-Strike Mode Cancels Double-Strike Mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 72 Hex 1B 48 ASCII ESC H 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print for the current line only. The mode set previously returns on subsequent lines. However, expanded print can be canceled with Cancel Expanded Print, DC4 or ESC W (0), before end of current line, or wrapping of the print buffer. This works with all three pitches (Pica, Elite, Compressed). This mode is also terminated by the execution of a Carriage Return, Line Feed, Form Feed, Vertical Tab or wrapping of the print buffer. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 14 14 Hex 1B 0E 0E ASCII ESC SO SO Cancel Double-Wide Print Cancels expanded print for the current line only. Modes set previously return on subsequent lines. However, it does not cancel expanded mode set by Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode, ESC W (1) or Master Select, ESC !. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 20 20 Hex 1B 14 14 ASCII DC4 DC4 Select Double-Wide Mode Enables expanded print until Cancel Expanded Print is encountered. Factory default disables double-wide mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 71 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Decimal 27 87 1*
Hex 1B 57 01*
ASCII ESC W 1*
Cancel Double-Wide Mode Cancels Double-Wide Print mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 87 0*
Hex 1B 57 00*
ASCII ESC W 0 Select Elite Pitch A character pitch of 12 cpi (characters per inch) is selected. This also cancels Pica Pitch (factory default = Pica). Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 77 Hex 1B 4D ASCII ESC M Select Emphasized Print Mode Enables Emphasized Print mode until Cancel Emphasized Mode is encountered. The text is made bolder by printing each dot twice, with the second dot slightly to the right of the first dot. Factory default disables Emphasized mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. 72 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Decimal 27 69 Hex 1B 4B ASCII ESC E Cancel Emphasized Print Mode Cancels Emphasized Pring mode. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 70 Hex 1B 46 ASCII ESC F Defining Intercharacter Space Format Format Defines the amount of space to the right of each character, in addition to the space allowed in the character design. The variable n represents the number of units of space, with each unit equal to 1/120 of an inch. Range of values for n is 0-63 with a factory default of 0. Decimal 27 32 n Hex 1B 20 n ASCII ESC SP n Select Italic Mode The text (nongraphic) characters are italicized. Factory default disables Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Decimal 27 52 Hex 1B 34 ASCII ESC 4 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 73 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Cancel Italic Mode Cancels the Italic mode. Note: This function does not work well with DBCS or alternate Single Byte Character Sets (SBCS). Format Format Decimal 27 53 Hex 1B 35 ASCII ESC 5 Master Select Allows you to specify a combination of print modes. The variable n is determined by combining values for the desired modes, by adding them together. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 33 n Hex 1B 21 n ASCII ESC ! n Valid combinations of the values in the following table include any combinations except that Pica cannot combine with Elite. Example Pica Compressed Italic Underlined, by adding values (00h + 04h + 40h +
80h), which results in C4h for the value of n. Master Select Values Hex Value 00h 01h 04h 08h 10h 20h Mode Pica Elite Condensed (compressed) Emphasized Double-Strike Double-Width (expanded) 74 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Master Select Values (continued) Hex Value 40h 80h Mode Italic Underlined The following print conflicts occur between modes. A mode in any column takes precedence over all modes in the columns to its right. 1 Elite 2 Emphasized 3 Compressed The following print modes can be combined producing different pitches:
Print Conflicts Print Modes Pitch 5 cpi 6 cpi 8.58 cpi 10 cpi 12 cpi 17.16 cpi Mode Expanded Expanded Elite Expanded Compressed Pica Elite Compressed Select Pica Pitch Selecta a character pitch of 10 cpi (characters per inch) (factory default). This also cancels Elite pitch. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Decimal 27 60 Hex 1B 50 ASCII ESC P 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 75 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Superscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the upper part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/
Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Format Format Format Decimal 27 83 0*
Hex 1B 53 00*
ASCII ESC S 0*
Select Subscript Mode Prints all subsequent characters in approximately 2/3 the normal height in the lower part of the character space, until Cancel Subscript/
Superscript is encountered. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 83 1*
Hex 1B 53 01*
ASCII ESC S 1*
Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancels the effects produced by Select Superscript Mode and Select Subscript Mode. Factory default also disables both of these modes. Note: This function is not supported in DBCS. Decimal 27 84 Hex 1B 54 ASCII ESC T 76 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Underline Mode Enables the underlining of all subsequent characters (including spaces) until the Cancel Underline mode function is encountered. Decimal 27 45 1*
Hex 1B 2D 01*
ASCII ESC 1*
Cancel Underline Mode Cancels the effect of the Select Underline mode. Factory default also disables the Underline mode. Format Format Decimal 27 45 0*
Hex 1B 2D 00*
ASCII ESC 0*
Tabs and Tab Setting Functions There are control codes for setting horizontal and vertical tabs. Horizontal tabs:
Are not affected by subsequent changes in pitch. May range up to maximum width for character and printer size. All previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. If the left margin is changed after the horizontal tabs are set, tab stops are cleared. Become absolute positions and are not affected by any subsequent change in character size. Set outside of the printable area are ignored. Vertical tabs:
Tab positions are line numbers, counting from the Top of Form. All tabs set beyond the page length are stored, but are not used. Any tab set within the SOP range (Skip Over Perforation), during the time SOP is active, are stored but not used until SOP is canceled. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 77 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions If a vertical tab, and the next tab stop is outside the printable page area, a form feed is executed placing the printhead at the next Top of Form. Previous tab stops are cleared when new tab stops are set. Are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Perform Horizontal Tab Moves the print position to the next horizontal tab stop. The tab positions, set by ESC D, the Set Horizontal Tabs function, are not affected by any changes in character pitch. The factory default tab settings are at intervals of eight characters, in the currently selected pitch. For the default tabs, the actual distance to each tab position is affected by changes in character pitch. Decimal 9 Hex 09 ASCII HT Set Horizontal Tabs Resets the current horizontal tabs, and new horizontal tabs are set up, based on the current character width (pitch). Format Format Decimal 27 68 n1 n2 ..nk 0 1B 44 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC D n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range for tab stops: 1-160), n2 is the second tab (all tabs in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum tabs: 32), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. 78 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Clear Horizontal Tabs Clears all horizontal tab stops. It is merely a variant behavior of the Set Horizontal Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, as existing tabs normally clear before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 68 0 Hex 1B 44 00 ASCII ESC D NUL Perform Vertical Tab Prints the contents of the current print buffer, and then moves the print position to the next vertical tab stop. If no channel is selected, then channel 0 is used. The carriage position is changed to the start of the next print line. If the vertical tab is performed beyond the last tab position set or beyond the last line of a form, then a form feed is performed. If no vertical tabs are defined, then the paper advances one line, using the currently selected line spacing, without changing the carriage position. Decimal 11 Hex 0B ASCII VT Set Vertical Tabs Resets the current tabs, and vertical tabs are set up, based on the current line spacing. Tab settings are not affected by subsequent changes in line spacing. Format Format Format Decimal 27 66 n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 42 n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC B n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs
(maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), NUL is the terminating character. All tab settings with this function are stored in channel 0. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 79 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Format Clear Vertical Tabs Clears all vertical tab stops . This is a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character. Decimal 27 66 0 Hex 1B 42 00 ASCII ESC B NUL Set Vertical Tabs in Channel This function works the same as the Set Vertical Tabs function, except that it stores the tabs into a specified channel, as specified by the variable c. This channel is selected for use by the Select Vertical Tab Channel function. Decimal 27 98 c n1 n2 .. nk 0 1B 62 c n1 n2 .. nk 00 ESC b c n1 n2 .. nk NUL ASCII Hex c is the channel number (range: 0-7), n1 is the first tab (range of values for tab stops: 1-255), n2 is the second tab (all tabs must be in ascending order), ... are subsequent tabs (maximum number of tabs: 16), nk is the last tab to set (any value less than the previous tab value acts as a terminating character), and NUL is the terminating character. Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Clears all vertical tab stops in the specified channel. This is merely a variant behavior of the Set Vertical Tabs in Channel function, where the NUL acts as an early terminating character, since this function normally clears the existing tabs before setting any new tabs. Decimal 27 98 c 0 Hex 1B 62 c 00 ASCII ESC b c NUL 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Vertical Tab Channel Selects a specified vertical tab channel. It sets up the current tabs from that channel. Once this function is performed, all subsequent Perform Vertical Tab commands use the tab stops from the list retrieved from the specified channel. At power on, the printer uses the tabs stored in channel 0. Format Decimal 27 47 c Hex 1B 2F c ASCII ESC / c c is the channel number (range: 0-7). Using Character Sets and User-Defined Functions You can install different character sets on the printer. In some cases more than one character set may be present at one time, depending on the amount of available font memory. The 6822 reserves 438K of memory for installing fonts in flash memory. You can install fonts using NPCP or the Printer Configuration Utility. Single-Byte Character Sets Single-byte character sets (SBCS) are supported for MS-DOS, PL/N, and Intermec application compatibility. Nft00000.mod is the default character set (font) for compatibility with the 6822 80-Column Printer. Nft00437.mod is the IBM/Microsoft compatible character set for code page 437. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 81 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Double-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character (DBCS) sets require two bytes to send to the printer to define the character to print. The first byte of the character code sent to the printer is known as a lead-in byte. The second byte of the character code is known as the trailing byte. Different character sets have different requirements for the values of both lead-in and trailing byte. When the lead-in byte does not fall in the range listed for the character set, a character from a SBCS may print. The following double-
byte character sets are supported by the 6822. Double Byte Character Sets Code Page 936 Font Module nft00936.mod nft00950.mod nft00932.mod nft00949.mod 950 932 949 DBCS Languages GB 2312 Chinese
(simplified) big 5 Traditional Chinese Shift JIS Japanese KSC 5601 Korean Lead-in Byte A1hABh B0hF7h A1hC6h C9hF9h 81h9Fh E0hFCh A1hACh B0hC8h CAhFDh Trailing Byte A1hFEh 40hFEh (except 7Fh) 40hFCh (except 7Fh) A1hFEh Multi-Byte Character Sets Double-byte character sets and single-byte character sets can mix when printing a report. This mixture is referred to as a Multi-Byte Character Set (MBCS). When a DBCS is selected, the characters from the SBCS code page currently selected are used for rendering character codes and control codes from 0 to 127. Codes above 127 (that fall within the range of lead-in bytes for the selected character set) treat the byte that follows as a trailing byte for that character set. Otherwise, for character codes above 128, the character code from the selected SBCS is printed. NFT00950.MOD (BIG 5 DBCS) does not allow the MBCS mode. For this character set, only control codes from 0-31 are treated as single byte characters when they are not proceeded by a lead-in byte. All escape sequence character strings are treated as SBCS. 82 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select National Character Set By default, code page 0 is selected by the printer at reset. Use the following escape sequence to select international character support. Escape sequence codes can only be used for code page 0. All other code pages use direct character code mapping to select the appropriate font for rendering. Decimal 27 82 n Hex 1B 52 n ASCII ESC R n n is 0-14 and is the country code, as shown in the International Character Sets table on the next page. The default value for n is zero (USA). A full 256 character set is not provided for these sets. There are 64 international characters stored in ROM, 32 in Roman and 32 in Italic. They are stored as codes 0-31 and 128-255. These are normally not accessible. The ESC R command makes these codes available, but only 12 characters at a time. These 12 are available in these positions of the ASCII character table: 35, 36, 64, 91, 92, 93, 94, 96, 123, 124, 125, and 126, as shown in the International Character Sets table. International Character Sets Country USA France Germany England (UK) Denmark 1 Sweden Italy Spain 1 Japan Norway Denmark 2 Spain 2 Latin America Country Number 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 35
P
64 92 93
94 36 91
96
123 124 125 126
b
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 83 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions International Character Sets (continued) Country Hebrew Greek Country Number 13 14 96 94 91 64 36 92 93 35 123 124 125 126 Hebrew fonts are available in the supplied font files. See Hebrew Character Fonts below. Greek fonts are available in the supplied font files. See the Greek Character Sets on page 85. Hebrew Character Fonts Hebrew characters represented by decimal values 38 and 65 through 90 are represented by the following 7x7 font descriptions. 70 69 68 67 66 72 71
*.*.*.* ..*...* .....*. *....*. .....* ...*... *....*. *....*. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... *.*.*.. ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 65
....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 73
....... ...... .....* ....... .....* ....... *...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 81 80 75 74 77 78 79 85 88 83 84 82 86 76 87 84 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions
....... ...... ...... ...... ...... ...... 89 90 91 Greek Character Sets Chr Dec A 97 B 98 99 G D 100 E 101 102 Z H 103 104 q Hex 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 Dec 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 Hex 69 6a 6b 6c 6d 6e 6f 70 Chr I K L M N X O P Dec 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 120 Hex 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 Chr P S T Y F X Y W The selected set stays in effect until the printer is reset and receives a Master Reset command, or a new international character set is selected. Note: This function is only used with the default character set. User Defined Characters This code addresses user-defined characters and selection into memory. Note: RAM-based definition or redefinition of standard characters is only useful when the default SBCS code page is selected. There is no method to redefine characters in the other code pages, since unique code pages can be created and loaded into the printer memory. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 85 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Copy ROM to RAM The characters in ROM are copied into RAM, so a complete user-defined character set is created by editing selected characters. This ensures that all characters are defined when a user-defined character set is selected. This eliminates the need to cancel the selection when printing defined characters. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 58 0 0 0 Hex 1B 3A 00 00 00 ASCII ESC . NUL NUL NUL Define User-Defined Characters Characters are redefined by the user in the currently selected mode. However, they can only be used in draft mode. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 38 0 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 Hex 1B 26 00 k1 k2 s1 d1 ... d11 ASCII ESC & k1 k2 s1 d1.....d11 k1 is the character code of the first character to redefine, k2 is the character code of the last character to redefine (any character between 0-255 can be redefined), and (k1 could equal k2, if only one character is defined). For each character defined, you must supply 12 bytes of data. Bits 0-3 represent the end position in the grid Bits 4-6 represent the start position in the grid Bit 7 determines whether the character uses the top eight pins or the bottom eight pins of the printhead. If bit 7 = 0, the top eight pins are s1 is the first byte that describes the character format 86 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions used. If bit 7 = 1, the bottom eight pins are used. The start and end positions are ignored during character imaging, but must be accurate to redefine the character code. d1...d11 is the data that comprises the dot image pattern of the defined character. When printable code expansion is enabled with ESC I, the Printable Code Area Expansion function, and the user-defined character set is selected with ESC % (1), the Select User-Defined Set function, then the codes (less than 20h and greater than 7Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. When printable code expansion is enabled with the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, and the user-defined character set is selected with the Select User-Defined Set function, then codes (between 80h and 9Fh) can be defined for use and are printable. For a list of these characters, refer to the Printable Code Expansion Characters on page 89 Select User-Defined Character Set A user-defined character set can be selected, after the Define User-Defined Characters function is used to define the character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 37 1 Hex 1B 25 01 ASCII ESC % (1) Select Default Character Set If the Select User-Defined Set function was previously set, this function switches back to the default character set. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Format Format Decimal 27 37 0 Hex 1B 25 00 ASCII ESC % (0) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 87 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 All codes (128-159) are treated as printable characters, rather than control codes, with this function. This allows the use of these characters for user-defined characters. A user-defined set must be selected, using the Select User-Defined Set function, before these characters can print. Factory default disables printing of these codes.. Note: This function can only be used when the default SBCS is selected. Decimal 27 54 Hex 1B 36 ASCII ESC 6 Disable Printing of Codes 128-159 Disables the printing of codes 128-159. By default, these codes are disabled. Decimal 27 55 Hex 1B 37 ASCII ESC 7 Expand Printable Code Area This function allows certain ASCII codes (00h to 1Fh) and codes (80h to 9Fh) to print when the variable n is set to the value of 1. This allows the use of these codes for user-defined characters. If n = 0, the function returns these two ranges of characters to non-printable control codes. A user-defined character set must be selected by ESC % (1), the Enable Printing of Codes 128-159 function, before these codes can print. In both ranges, only the following codes can redefine as printable characters. Codes not listed, within the range (00h-1Fh), print as standard control codes. Codes not listed, within the range (80h-9Fh), are converted to a control code in the range of (00h-1Fh), by subtraction of 80h. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. 88 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Decimal 27 73 n Hex 1B 49 n ASCII ESC I n Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Printable Code Expansion Characters ASCII Hex DC1 00 NAK 01 02 SYN ETB 03 FS 04 GS 05 06 RS US 10 ASCII NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK DLE Hex 11 15 16 17 1C 1D 1E 1F Hex 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 90 ASCII none none none none none none none none Hex 91 95 96 97 9C 9D 9E 9F ASCII none none none none none none none none Format Enable Printing of Character Graphics Enables the printing of character graphics, until disabled with the Disable Printing of Character Graphics function. Note: This function is only useful with the default SBCS. Decimal 27 116 1 Hex 1B 74 01 ASCII ESC t (1) For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the codes (00h-1Fh), listed above in the Printable Code Expansion Characters table are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 89 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the international character set selection is not in effect. For the character value 127 (7Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character associated with the code page is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh), the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. Disable Printing of Character Graphics Disables the printing of character graphics. Factory default disables this function. Decimal 27 116 0 Hex 1B 74 00 ASCII ESC t (0) Printing Character Graphics This function allows printing of character graphics from the currently selected SBCS code page, by sending a graphics string to the printer. The values of the graphics data bytes can range between 0-255. Decimal 27 43 n d1 ... dn Hex 1B 2B n d1 ... dn ASCII ESC + n d1 ... dn n is the length of the character graphic string and d1 ... dn are the character graphics data stream. The number of data bytes must be equal to the value of the variable n. The range of values (for the characters in each graphics data byte):
0-255. For character values from 0 to 31 (00h-1Fh):
Format Format 90 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e IBM character graphics symbol set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, currently selected single byte code page character graphics are printed. For character values from 32 to 126 (20h-7Eh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the selected international character set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character from the currently selected code page are printed. For the character value 127 (7Fh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, a space is printed When other SBCS code pages are selected, the character graphics symbol is printed. For character values from 128 to 255 (80h-FFh):
When the default SBCS code page is selected, the FX-86e Epson Character Graphics set is printed. When other SBCS code pages are selected, the corresponding character is printed. Graphics Functions Eight-Pin Graphics Modes All 8-pin graphics functions require parameters, n1 and n2, which represent the length of the graphics string that follows the Select Graphics Mode command, and are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):
The simplest calculation, is to divide n (total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots (columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. n = total number of graphics dots needed for the graphic string n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 91 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Format Format Select Graphics Mode Enables the Graphics moderepresented by the variable m in the Graphic Modes table. The total number of dot columns to print is represented by n1 and n2. Any graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 42 m n1 n2 Hex 1B 2A m n1 n2 ASCII ESC * m n1 n2 Reassign Graphics Mode Changes Graphic modes. Decimal 27 63 s n Hex 1B 3F s n ASCII ESC ? s n s is one of the K, I, Y, or Z characters and n is one of the 0-7 modes as shown in Graphic Modes table. Graphic Modes Mode Single-density Low Speed Doubledensity
*High Speed Double-density
*Low-Speed Quadruple-density CRT I SingleDensity Plotter CRT II
*Double-Density Plotter
*Adjacent dots in a given row cannot be printed in these modes. m Dots per Inch / Dots per 8 in Line 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 960 dots per 8 in line 120 dots per inch, 920 dots per 8 in line 240 dots per inch, 1920 dots per 8 in line 60 dots per inch, 480 dots per 8 in line 72 dots per inch, 576 dots per 8 in line 90 dots per inch, 720 dots per 8 in line 144 dots per inch, 1152 dots per 8 in line 92 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Single Density Graphics Mode This is a simple method of printing graphics. The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8 in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 75 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4B n1 n2 ASCII ESC K n1 n2 Select Low-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode If Single Density graphics does not produce high enough density, try this mode. The number of dots per inch is doubled. However, the speed is reduced to half of what it would be with single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. This is 8-pin single density graphics. The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-inch line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Decimal 27 76 n1 n2 Hex 1B 4C n1 n2 ASCII ESC L n1 n2 Select High-Speed Double Density Graphics Mode This 8-pin graphics mode produces the same density as the Low-Speed Double Density mode, however, the speed is doubled. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 89 n1 n2 Hex 1B 59 n1 n2 ASCII ESC Y n1 n2 The resolution is still 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 93 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Graphics Mode With this 8-pin graphics mode, the number of dots per inch has gone up to 4x what it was in single density. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described on page 94. Decimal 27 90 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5A n1 n2 ASCII ESC Z n1 n2 The resolution is now 240 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 1920 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Make sure adjacent dots in a given dot row are not printed. Nine-Pin Graphics Modes These 9-pin graphics functions also require two parameters, n1 and n2. However, they are calculated slightly different than in the 8-pin graphics modes. Since two data bytes represent each dot column to print, first divide the total length of the graphic string (following the Select ... Graphics Mode command) by two. These parameters are calculated as follows (assuming a temporary variable n):
First, divide n (the total number of dots needed for the graphics string) by 2, then divide the result by 256. Then n2 is the quotient (the whole number) and n1 is the remainder. If you require less than 256 dots
(columns), then n1 indicates the number of dots and n2 is set to zero. Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Enables Single Density 9-pin Graphics mode. Calculating the parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes. n = total number of dots needed, divided by 2 n2 = integer of (n divided by 256) n1 = remainder of the n2 calculation Decimal 27 94 0 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 00 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Format Format 94 Format Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions The resolution is 60 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 480 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Enables Double Density, 9-pin graphics Mode. The parameters, n1 and n2, is described previously under Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Decimal 27 94 1 n1 n2 Hex 1B 5E 01 n1 n2 ASCII ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 The resolution is now 120 dots per inch. Each 8-in line can accommodate 960 columns of graphic dots. A graphic string that exceeds the length of the print line is discarded. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 95 Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions 96 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual part 3 | Users Manual | 1.34 MiB | January 05 2008 |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6 Troubleshooting This chapter helps you correct printing problems that may occur. If you experience a printing problem, you can perform several tests to find and possibly correct the problem. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Checking the power source Aligning the printer mechanism Troubleshooting system components Communications pin-out configurations 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 97 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Checking the Power Source Press any button on the printer control panel. If there is power, the power indicator (green LED) turns on and the printhead moves to its starting position. If the printer emits beeps and any of the other indicators light up or flash, observe the number of beeps and indicator flashes and see Printer Failure Indicators on page 102 If there is no reaction from the printer after you press a key on the control panel, or only the green power light blinks, verify that the power cables are properly connected between the printer mechanism and its power source (internal battery, vehicle cable, or ac). If none of these steps wake up the printer with the problem, then you need to return the printer for service. Internal battery Check the battery and its cable by installing into another known-
good printer. Vehicle cable Attach the printer in question to another vehicle power cable. AC power Plug the printer into another outlet. Aligning the Printer Mechanism If head jams occur, you may need to align the printer mechanism. To align the printer mechanism 1 Open the printer top cover, then install a ribbon cartridge (see page 15) and position the printhead to the far left toward the green thumb wheel. 98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 2 Check the area between the printhead and the printer cavity. If the ribbon cartridge touches the pivot frame, the printer mechanism needs realignment. Pivot frame Printhead at far left in the printer 3 Loosen the four screws that hold the mechanism in place using a Phillips screwdriver (see the following illustration). 4 Push the printer mechanism to the right away from the green thumb wheel. 5 Press on the right side of the printer mechanism to the back as far as it will go. Note: In this position, the right back edge of the printer mechanism may touch the pivot frame. The left side must not touch the pivot frame. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 99 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 6 Hold the printer mechanism in place and tighten the screws in the sequence shown below. 3 Top left 1 Top right 2 Bottom left 4 Bottom right Four screws hold down the printer mechanism Troubleshooting System Components The printing system is composed of four basic components: printer, computer, power source, and communications. Any one of these components can prevent the printer from functioning properly. Verifying the Printer Components Power Source Verification Start by verifying that power is available at the printer. Visually inspect the control panel to verify that the power indicator (green LED) is lit. If it is not, press the Set Page button and note if the power indicator lights up. If it does, the power system is all right. If it does not, press the printer reset button. If the power indicator still does not light, check the power cable, by connecting it to a different printer. If the power indicator works on the new printer, then the cable is all right, and the printer that was originally connected is suspect. If it does not light, then the problem is most likely the cable or the power source. Depending on the results, either replace the cable or return the printer for service. 100 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Verification If the power indicator works properly and the printer still does not print, then printer errors are noted. If any indicators light when you press the Set Page button, or the printer beeps, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 to determine the problem. If none of the listed conditions are indicated by the beep codes and LEDs, yet the printer does not perform properly, then perform a printer self-test. Press and hold (for several seconds) both Form Feed and the Set Page buttons at the same time, until the printer beeps and all indicator lights come on. The lights change throughout the test, as it progresses. At the end of the self-test, the printer generates a report. This report verifies the following: errors detected during self-test, the error history, and the communication configuration. If the printer self-test report does not print, then reset the printer. If the report does print after resetting, then the printer is all right and the reason the printer does not respond to PC print requests is probably communications or PC related. If the report is partially completed, and a printer error occurs during the printing of self-test, refer to the Printer Failure Indicators table on page 102 for the cause of the printer failure. Perform a power-on-self-test (POST) to test for errors either by resetting the printer or powering it up. If errors occur, audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST (see the POST Error Codes table on page 104). If the POST completes without error, try the printer self-test again. If the self-test prints correctly, but the printer does not respond to the PC, then the problem may be related to communications or PC problems. Communications / PC Verification Use the self-test report to verify that the communications protocol options, selected at the printer, match those expected by the host. If they do not match the expected results, reconfigure the printer using the control panel configuration modes described below in the Configuration part of this chapter. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 101 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting If the protocol options match, then the communications cable may be defective. To determine if the cable is working, substitute a new cable. If the PC is suspect, substitute a different PC. A defective computer dock might be another possibility. Understanding Printer Errors Printer Errors are divided into classes:
Runtime errors POST errors, Fatal errors (consisting of flash write errors and EEPROM block errors). Runtime Errors Runtime errors can occur during the course of printing. These errors are displayed on the LEDs, along with beep sequences. This causes the printer to stop printing and enter an error state. Then beep sequences are emitted, LED codes are displayed, the error status may be sent to the host (depending on the protocol), and the printer goes into suspend mode. The printer exits from the suspend mode when the user presses one of the keyboard keys or communications is resumed from the host. The printer also places the printhead in its home position and attempts to recover from the error condition. Until the error condition is corrected, the error procedure does not end, and the error state is not removed. For paper out errors, load paper and press the Set Page button before printing begins. Press the Form Feed button to load the paper to the top of form. The following table provides a listing of printer failure indicators and describes what they mean. Printer Failure Indicators Sets of Beeps 1 beep 1 set of 2 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off Off On 2 blinks Off Off 1 set of 3 beeps Off Off 3 blinks Meaning 12 V under voltage fault (Low Battery) 12 V over voltage fault (Input Voltage too high) 24 V under voltage fault (internal power supply failure) 102 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Failure Indicators (continued) Sets of Beeps 1 set of 4 beeps Paper Out Head Jam Low Batt Off 4 blinks Off 1 set of 13 beeps 2 sets of 2 beeps 2 sets of 3 beeps 2 sets of 4 beeps 5 sets of 2 beeps Off Off On Off 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off On 5 blinks Off 2 blinks Off Off 5 blinks 3 sets of 2 beeps 3 blinks Off 3 blinks 3 sets of 4 beeps 4 sets of 2 beeps 12 sets of 12 beeps Off Off 4 blinks 3 blinks 4 blinks Off Off Off Off Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Meaning 24 V over voltage fault (internal power supply failure) Configuration error printhead over temperature Paper Out Head Jam Paper feed current fault
(Possible paper jam or feed motor failure) printhead over current (printhead failure) Home switch failure printhead short (printhead failure) Operating System software failure Note: The most common errors are Paper Out, Low Battery, and Head Jam. Status indicators on the front panel alert you to these errors. For a description see Understanding the Status Indicators on page 3 Power-On-Self-Test (POST) Errors When you reset the printer, a POST runs to determine why the printer might be failing. Audible error codes, along with indicator light status, are produced during POST if an error occurs. See on POST Error Codes on page 104. To perform a POST 1 Open the printer case. 2 Insert the printer diagnostic cable into the phone jack on the printer and then connect the 9-pin D-Sub plug to your PC. The cable is used during POST to configure the printer, access printer diagnostics, update software, and install new fonts. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 103 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting 3 Press the Reset button to start the POST. When the POST starts, green Power LED will come on followed by a single beep indicating that the printer is active. Note: After the test is completed, all LEDs turn off and the printhead moves to the home position. Only runtime errors or fatal errors are reported until the next time the printer is reset and POST is performed. The printer emits beeps and flashes the LEDs to indicate the cause of any POST errors. POST error codes are described in the following table. POST Error Codes Long Beep 0 0 0 Short Beep 1 0 0 Paper Out Off Off Off Head Jam Off Off Off Low Batt Off Off Off Power Meaning On Off On 1 1 1 1 0 1 1 0 1 2 4 4 0 5 5 0 Off Off Off Off On On On On On On Off Off Off Off On On Off On Off On Off On Off On On On On On On On On On Operational No Power Control program Initial Program Load (IPL) successful Invalid CRC on boot block Invalid CRC on control program or program not found Upper 192K RAM failure Upper 64K RAM failure Diagnostic mode command check Diagnostic flash memory check failed or is not initialized Diagnostic memory write failure Control program IPL Fatal Errors There are two types of fatal errors, flash write errors and EEPROM configuration block errors. These errors are extremely rare, but measures are built into the printer diagnostics to track possible occurrences. Flash Write Errors Errors related to writing or erasing flash are critical errors. These errors cause the printer to stop all processing and produce an LED code and a sequence of beeps. The LED code indicates the address of the segment where the error occurred in octal notation. 104 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting The octal digit changes every four beeps until four octal digits are output. Only four octal digits are output since blocks are 256 bytes in size and flash can be addressed with a total of 0x7ff blocks. The segment address output is the runtime address of the flash block and not the offset of the block within flash. To obtain the block offset within the flash Subtract 0x800 from the address output to determine the block offset. The printer suspends after the processing the error code. When the printer resumes, an error again and the printer suspends again. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Note: Flash write errors may be unrecoverable. EEPROM Configuration Block Errors Errors related to an invalid configuration block (diagnostic block) produce 13 beeps, and then the printer suspends. It continues to produce this symptom until the configuration block error is corrected. Configuration block errors may be caused by a flash write error or an incorrect printer configuration. Reset the printer to correct the error. If a reset does not correct the error, have the printer checked by a qualified service technician. Self-Test Function Descriptions The self-test performs the following functions. Boot Block Program Verification A CRC (Cyclic Redundancy Check) is performed on the boot block program. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Control Program Verification A CRC is performed on the control program, which is loaded into writable flash program memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. The results of this test are printed on the self-test report. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 105 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Font Module Verification A CRC is performed on the font modules, which are loaded into writable flash font memory. The calculated CRC is compared to the CRC embedded in the program module. Results are printed on the self-test report. A2D Check Current reading of the A2D sources are performed, and the results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Verification A CRC is performed on the area of the nonvolatile diagnostic memory that has a CRC over it. Results are printed on the self-test report. Nonvolatile Diagnostic Memory Update The nonvolatile diagnostic memory is updated from the nonvolatile diagnostic memory data shadowed in memory. Detailed Printer Self-Test Perform a self-test to verify printer functions, and provide reporting of printer diagnostics. The self-test performs a series of internal diagnostics and prints the results. When the self-test begins, the beeper sounds for half a second and all LEDs turn on for half a second. Initiating Self-Test While the printer is idle or in Suspend mode, press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to initiate a self-test. Terminating Self-Test Press the Line Feed and Set Page buttons simultaneously to manually terminate a self-test. Self-Test Report Note: This method is recommended to determine printer functionality. 106 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting A self-test is equivalent to a warm start. Both are performed when you simultaneously press Form Feed and Set Page buttons on the control panel for a few seconds. Release the buttons when the printer beeps and all indicators are lit. If you press the buttons for too long, the self-test will not happen and the printer will form-feed one page. As the self-test progresses, the indicator lights change. Internal tests are performed and the two page report is printed. This report provides helpful information in diagnosing and troubleshooting printer problems. When you perform a self-test, the following actions occur:
All LEDs are turned on to verify the lights work A 600 ms beep is emitted to verify the beeper works LEDs flash individually to show progress during internal tests Current voltage and ambient temperature are obtained Validity of diagnostic block program is checked Validity of boot block program is checked Validity of control program is checked Validity of loaded fonts is checked LEDs turn off Self-test report is printed Printer capability is diagnosed by printing the report. Device errors are displayed on the LEDs and emitted by the beeper. The printer then does a warm reset (soft reboot) when an error is encountered or when the self-
test report prints. Understanding the Self-Test Report The self-test report is divided into sections. Refer to page 110 and page 111 for a sample printout. All other values are informational only. Remember that these values are cleared after the self-test. The printer model number is given on line 1 (first line). This identifies the printer type used, in this case the 6822. The 8-digit serial number of the printer is listed on line 4 under the Serial# heading on line 3. The serial number is also on the inside of the printer. In portable printers, raise the printer mechanism to look for the number on the inside back wall. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 107 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Battery Voltage, (line 13) Indicates the input voltage sampled at the beginning of the self-test. The input range must be between 7.5 and 15 V. The input voltage must be greater than 10.5 V to charge the internal battery. At 7.5 V or less, the Low Batt LED comes on and the printer enters Sleep mode. At 10.5 V or less, the Low Batt comes on but the printer still prints. Auto Feed (line 16) Auto feed is a configurable item. Carriage Return (CR) means no auto linefeed. This is the most common setting for applications using NPCP CR+LF means a line feed will be added to each CR. This setting can produce double-spacing of reports. See Setting the Autofeed on page 29 Interface Mode (line 17) Interface mode lists the interface protocol for the printer. The typical setting is NPCP. Others include DTR with no, odd, or even parity, and IrDA. See Protocol Selection Mode on page 29 Bit Rate (line 18) Bit rate is commonly set to 19200 (19.2K) or 9600 bps. See Selecting the Bit Rate on page 29 A2D History (lines 21 through 25) Shows the recorded history for voltage measurements and temperature measurements. Head Jam History (lines 26 through 29) Provides information on head jams. If the printer is having frequent head jams, these lines can assist in determining the problem. Head Jam History Information Heading Home Command Direction Speed Description Err indicates the home position LED sensor has failed. Indicates which printer command was executed when the head jammed. Indicates which way the head was moving, left is toward the home position and right is away from the home position. Home position is at the extreme left, toward the green thumb wheel. Indicates the acceleration speed of the printhead when the jam occurred. 108 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Head Jam History Information (continued) Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Heading Step Temp Position Description The acceleration step at the jam. 0 means no steps were taken, 15 means all steps were taken. 1-14 indicates the printer jammed during acceleration or deceleration. The ambient temperature at the last head jam. The temperature is listed in Celsius. Position of carriage at the time of the jam in 1/720 in = 12 *
step position. Divide the number by 12 to get the step position. There are 512 steps across the page. If it is jammed at position 0, check the printer mechanism alignment. If it is jamming in the middle, it is more likely a dirty ribbon or obstruction in the printheads path. Head Dot Pattern (line 37) Is used to verify the individual dot wires. There should be nine dots. If some dots are missing, it could be a printhead failure or a circuit board failure. Error Log information appears on lines 38-43. This information is cleared after every self-test. Error Log Information Heading PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault Description Number of paper jams while feeding paper Number of head jams while printhead is moving Number of 12 V under-voltage Number of 12 V over-voltage Number of 24 V under-voltage (head/motor voltage) Number of 24 V over-voltage Number of home detect errors (typically caused by paper scraps or circuit failures) Unused Number of head over-current errors (typically caused by a bad printhead) Number of head driver short errors (typically caused by circuit failures) Number of paper feed motor over current errors (excess current in paper feed motor could indicate circuit failure) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 109 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Error Log Information (continued) Heading ADErr EEErr Dlink Llink Description Number of A2D conversion failures Number of EEPROM write failures to diagnostic block Number of software memory errors (corruption in internal memory) Number of software memory errors Sample First Page of the Self-Test Note: Lines 15-18 are factory default printer settings. Take note of these lines when reading the self-test report.
------------------------------------------- 1NP6822 2 Copyright 1997, 1998, Intermec Technologies Corporation. All Rights Reserved. 3Serial# MFG Date Hardware Check Repairs Svc Date 412345678 yy/mm/dd ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (TOP) GO/NG 00 yy/mm/dd 5 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (MLB) 6 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (PS) 7 ddd-ddd-ddd/dddd (IOB) 8Revisions:..........0000000000303100 9Bootblock: NPBB6822.MOD - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 10Control Program: npfl6822.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 11Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 12Font Module: nftxxxxx.mod - Version XX.XX XXXX XXXX GO/NG 13Battery Voltage: 012.34 Low...../....High 14Total Pages: 123456 15Zero Font Style: O 16Auto Feed: CR 17Interface mode: NPCP 18Bit Rate: 19200 19Cold Starts: 00024 20Warm Starts: 00050 21A2D History 22 Curr Low High Min Max Error Page Count 2324v: 024.00 023.21 023.91 023.21 024.51 027.21 00401 00021 2412v: 012.55 010.91 013.51 010.90 014.50 8.71 00401 00021 25Temp: 023 -020 055 -021 060 000 00401 00021 26Head Jam History 27Total Head Jams: 00186 28Home Command Direction Speed Step Temp Position Page 29 Print Left Const 010 -010 01440 12345 30NPCP History 31Disc Addr Parity IFTS Seq CRC Frame Bind IPLDU 3212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 33IRDA History 34 FramesOk BroadCasts CRC/TMO DISCARD 35rx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 36tx 1234567890 1234567890 0123456789 0000000000 37HEAD DOT PATTERN 38 Error Log 39PE HJ 12Vu 12Vo 24Vu 24Vo Home Temp OverC HeadS Fault ADErr EEErr 40Dlink Llink 4112345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4212345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 4312345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 12345 110 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Sample Second Page of the Self-Test Page 2 of the self-test contains the print pattern used to diagnose printer mechanical behavior. The pattern continuously prints the ASCII characters between 33 and 126 decimal inclusive for the entire page, or until you cancel the print by pressing a button on the printer. An example of that rotating pattern is shown below.
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXYZ[\]^_abcdefghijklmnopqrstuvwxyz{|}~!#$%
0123456789:;<=>?@ABCDEFGHIJKL Self-Test Failure For help, see Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips on page 111. Check the power source (internal battery, charge cable, or ac adaptor) for a possible power failure. Miscellaneous Troubleshooting Tips The following table lists actual printing problems, possible causes, and actions you should take to correct a problem. Possible Printer Problems Symptom Printer does not communicate with the mobile computer. Bluetooth unable to connect. Make sure you are in range
(10 cm to 10 m) Double-spacing on application reports but single-
spacing on self-test. Zero prints incorrectly (with or without slash). Solution Test or Cause Incorrect protocol selection. Check lines 17 and 18 on the self-test report for correct bit rate and protocol selection. Change protocol settings through configuration process. Make sure the Bluetooth shutdown timer has not expired Make sure your device is configured to be discoverable and/or connectable. For help, see Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications on page 133. Check line 16 on the self-test report. CR+LF indicates an incorrect configuration for NPCP. Check line 15 on the selftest report for the Zero Font Style setting. For help, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22. If incorrect, adjust the zero print option, see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 111 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Check line 11 or 12 on the Does not print extended character set missing font. selftest report to see if the NFT0000.MOD file is listed after Font Module. Printer mechanism does not have adequate power for printing. The 12 V may be under or over voltage fault.
(Note: Error lights do not flash if voltage is too high) If power supply, adjust supply voltage to 7.5 to 15 V. Printer emits 1 or 2 beeps or blinking green light is the only indicator. If battery, recharge or replace
(see Installing the Internal Battery on page 10 Printer emits 2 sets of 3 beeps Printer out of paper Printer works but some or all LEDs do not work. Printer does not print Gray ribbon cable connecting control panel board to pivot frame assembly is loose. No voltage No data input Test: Pull paper toward roller. Cause: If paper is resistant:
Paper wrinkled, creased, moist, or perforations missing Adjust supply voltage to 7.5-15 V Tighten computer connections. Paper tray too full White ribbon cables obstructing paper Ensure fewer than 200 3-ply sheets in the deep paper tray and fewer than 50 3-ply sheets in the shallow paper tray. Solution Use the 6820 Printer Tool Kit to reload the font file or send the printer in for hardware repair. Check battery or power supply. Check the printers internal battery, if installed. Check the vehicle charge cable (see 6822 Printer Installation Instructions P/N 931-052-001). Reload paper into printer mechanism. For help, see Loading the Paper Tray on page 13. Call Customer Support
(800-755-5505) or send printer for hardware repair. Voltage too high or low. Check line 13 on the selftest report, under the Battery Voltage heading No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Torn paper perforation Head Jams due to carriage alignment. Check line 29 on self-test report, under Position heading, for value. Remove torn paper, load and center new paper, readjust pinfeed holders. 112 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Possible Printer Problems (continued) Symptom Test or Cause Straighten the white ribbon Replace the paper. cables. No paper feed (paper jam or head jam) Move the printhead manually from side to side. Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Solution If 0, realign mechanism in pivot tray. See Aligning the Printer Mechanism on page 98 Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If smooth, ribbon is jammed. Remove ribbon cartridge, move printhead. If still resistant, mask spring is bent or damaged. Cause: printhead gap adjuster too tight. Cause: Paper scraps found in printer mechanism or around platen. Printer mechanism unlatched
(unlocked). (portable, fixed mount printers) Remove ribbon cartridge and turn knob. If ribbon resists, replace ribbon cartridge (see Installing the Ribbon Cartridge on page 11 Replace the mask spring see Cleaning the Mask Spring on page 22 Set the head gap adjuster to the fifth notch away from the paper see Adjusting the Printhead Gap on page 12 If ribbon cartridge bumps against inside of printer, check white ribbon cable, home position sensor, and four screws. Remove any paper scraps, do a cleaning. Latch (lock) the printer mechanism into place. Perform a self-test. Note: In paper jams or head jams, press the Set Page button to clear the printer before printing can resume. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 113 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Compatibility Issues Use the following information to determine some compatibility issues that come up relative to the 6822:I Compatibility Issues and Conclusions Issue Does a 6820 ribbon work on the 6822?
Do 6820 applications work on the 6822?
Conclusion Yes. Yes. Applications that work on the 6820 also work on the 6822. Yes. The downloadable character set feature is the same for both the 6820 and 6822. Does the 6822 work with an application that downloads some custom characters to the printer?
Can 6820 printers be replaced with 6822s? Yes. 6822s can be installed on existing 6820 mounting brackets. Understanding Diagnostic Information Diagnostic information is stored in flash to support the hardware configuration, both at time of manufacture and in the field. This includes recording the initial configuration changes to hardware and software, and various environmental statistics helpful in determining why failures are occurring in the field. The flash is provided for storage of critical data that must remain in the unit after power to the unit is lost. The data in the flash is used for diagnostic information for a catastrophic failure, or over the phone with a customer. Diagnostic information is updated and maintained by the printer. All diagnostic information is shadowed in RAM. At the end of every 50 forms, the flash information is updated from the RAM. The printer also updates the diagnostic information for nonrecoverable error, printer resets, printer self-test, and remote polling of diagnostic information. Fields are stored with ID first, then length, then data. The details of the data and the length of the entire field, including ID and Length bytes, are shown in the Diagnostic Information table on page 115. The amount of flash memory reserved for nonvolatile diagnostic memory is 16 K bytes. Printer self-test prints most of the information contained in the diagnostic memory for remote and end-user diagnostic access. 114 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Diagnostic Information Field Id 01 Length Description 4 3 Serial Number Date of Manufacture, yy/mm/dd Hardware Configuration ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (top level P/N) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (control board) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (power supply) ddd-ddd-ddd/ddd (I/O board) CRC of preceding fields Hardware Revisions: ECNs. applied. 64 ECNs can record separately by number 1-64. Service Repairs: a two-digit field indicating number of times serviced Date of last repair, yy/mm/dd Cold starts since MFG or last repair Warm starts since last cold start Pages printed over life Last high and low voltage extremes on 24 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme history stores min/max 24 V A2D conversions over printer life 24 V voltage error. Voltages greater than 10%
considered errors. A2D error count Form number at last voltage error 24 V error count Last high and low voltage extremes on 12 V input over last 50 reports. Extremes stored as 8-bit A2D conversions Voltage extreme stores min/max 12 V A2D conversions over printer life 12 V error. Voltages less than 10.5 V and greater than 14.5 V are considered errors. A2D value is recorded Page number at last 12 V error 12 V error count Temperature, maximum and minimum over last 50 reports. Set A2D value 7 7 7 7 2 8 1 3 2 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 2 1 2 2 2 08 09 10 20 30 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length Stored as 7 digit BCD set at MFG 39 bytes 6 digit BCD set at MFG 52 digit BCD set at MFG 2 byte binary set at MFG 8 byte bit field 11 bytes 2 BCD digits 6 BCD digits binary digits binary digits binary digits 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 8 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 11 bytes 115 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 Temperature, min/max over printer life. Set A2D value Temperature error. Last A2D conversion below -10 or above 60C recorded Page number at last temperature error Total number of temperature errors Total number of head jams Command 0 = Stop 2 = Print 4 = Print/LF 6 = Seek 8 = Slow Seek 10 = Change Speed 12 = Feed 14 = Wait Speed 00 = Init 01 = Low 10 = High Direction 1 = Left 0 = Right Home Switch 0 = No Error 1 = High Error Acceleration or deceleration stop motor value when jam occurred Ambient temperature when had jam occurred. Set A2D value Form number where head jam occurred Carriage position where head jam occurred IrDA rxFramesOK total frames received OK Total Length 11 bytes Stored as 2 bytes 1 byte 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes binary bits 0-3 bits 4-5 bit 6 bit 7 1 byte binary 1 byte 2 bytes binary 2 bytes binary in 1/720 in 4 bytes 46 bytes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 1 2 2 2 1 1 1 2 2 4 40 60 116 Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 4 Stored as 4 bytes Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Total Length 74 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes IrDA rxFrameCrcErr total frames received with CRC error IrDA rxTotalBytes total bytes received OK 4 bytes IrDA rxFramesDiscardBuf total frames 4 bytes discarded due to no buffer space IrDA rxBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames received OK IrDA rxFramesDiscardHwErr total received frames discarded due to hardware error IrDA txFramesOK total frames transmitted OK IrDA txTotalBytes total bytes transmitted OK IrDA txBroadcastFrames total broadcast frames transmitted OK IrDA txFramesNotTxTimeout total frames not transmitted due to time out IrDA txFramesNotTxHwErr total frames not transmitted due to a hardware error Paper out count Head jam count 12 V low count 12 V high count 24 V low count 24 V high count Home switch error count Unused Over current error count Head short error count Paper fault error count A2D conv. error count EEPROM write error count Double link error count Lost link error count 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 2 bytes 4 bytes 4 bytes 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 70 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 117 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Diagnostic Information (continued) Field Id Length Description 2 2 Out of buffers error count Unused Total Length Stored as 2 bytes 20 * 2 bytes 118 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Communications Pin-Out Configurations Chapter 6 Troubleshooting This section shows common cable configurations between a mobile computer or a dock and the printer. Mobile Computer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Chassis Ground Charge Input SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RTS (Ready To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) Dock_A/B_SW shell 8 9 7 2 6 3 5 4 NC shield 1 9 7 6 20 5 4 3 2 12 Wall Mount Printer or Remote Mount Terminal Holder Signal Name NC (No Connection) HHC_CHARGE GND DTR NC RTS CTS TXD RXD Term A/B 8 1 15 9 13 1 25 14 15-Pin DSUB Male 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 15-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-605-1XX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 119 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Wall Mount Printer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name DTR (Data Terminal Ready)*
RC (Receive Carrier) TC (Transmit Carrier) DCD (Data Carrier Detect) SG (Signal Ground) DSR (Data Set Ready)*
CTS (Clear to Send) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2
* Signals are not available on the 6100 Dock 20 17 15 8 7 6 5 4 3 2 NC (No Connection) NC NC NC GND DTR RTS CTS TXD RXD 1 13 14 25 13 1 25 14 25-Pin DSUB Female 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin to 25-Pin Cable (P/N 216-771-XXX) 25-Pin DSUB Male 120 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) RXD (Receive Data) RTS (Ready to Send) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready) SG (Signal Ground) Chassis Ground 3 2 7 8 6 5 4 5 3 6 7 9 RCT TXD CTS RTS DTR (Data Terminal Ready) GND shield shell shell 8 Chassis Ground Terminal Charge out to computer 1 5 6 9 1 8 9 15 9-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 9-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-016-XXX) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 121 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Dock Printer w/6210 Terminal Holder Signal Name Pin #
Pin #
Signal Name TXD (Transmit Data) DTR (Data Terminal Ready) RTS (Ready to Send) RXD (Receive Data) CTS (Clear to Send) DSR (Data Set Ready)*
SG (Signal Ground) 2 20 4 3 5 6 7 4 2 3 5 6 7 9 RXD NC (No Connection) CTS TXD RTS DTR GND open shield shell
* Signal is not available on the 6100 Dock 13 1 25 14 8 1 15 9 25-Pin DSUB Male 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 25-Pin to 15-Pin Cable (P/N 226-162-XXX) 15-Pin DSUB Female 122 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Chapter 6 Troubleshooting PC Printer Pin #
Pin #
7 5 3 2 8 6 5 3 2 1 5 1 9 6 1 6 9-Pin DSUB Male Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) RJ-11 Jack Data Communications Cable (P/N 226-270-XXX) The printer has a 25-pin connector with the following pinout designations and signal mnemonics:
Printer Communications Connector 15-Pin DSub 1 2 3 4 5 6 25Pin DSub Signal Name NC 20 4 2 3 5 NC DSR (Data Set Ready) CTS (Clear To Send) RXD (Receive Data) TXD (Transmit Data) RTS (Ready To Send) Type RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 RS-232 I/O IN IN IN OUT OUT Description NC (No Connection) Printers DSR Wake up Printers RxD Printers TxD Printers RTS 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 123 Chapter 6 Troubleshooting Printer Communications Connector (continued) 15-Pin DSub 7 25Pin DSub Signal Name 6 Type RS-232 DTR (Data Terminal Ready) HHC_CHARGE GND 8 9 9 7 I/O OUT OUT Description Printers DTR 11-13 V, 2 A maximum SG (Signal Ground) POWER POWER 124 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual A Specifications This appendix provides physical specifications for the 6822 printer models as well as specifications for the media used with the printers. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 125 Appendix A Specifications Specifications Print Speed 230 cps Note: Various print fonts do affect the print speed. Weight Fixed Mount Printers6.55 kg (14.41 lbs) Portable Printers w/ 4000 or 61XX terminal holder5.80 kg (12.75 lbs) w/ 62XX, 600 series, 700 series, or CK60 holder5.67 kg (12.25 lbs) Mounting plate1.93 kg (4.25 lbs) Flat paper tray2.45 kg (5.40 lbs) Compact paper tray2.05 kg (4.50 lbs) Temperature DC Operating -20C to 60C (-4F to 140F) AC Operating -20C to 45C (-4F to 113F) Storage -30C to 70C (-22F to 158F) Humidity Operating10 to 85% noncondensing Storage5 to 95% noncondensing Altitude Operating100 to 5000 m Storage15,000 m Electrical Voltage13.8 VDC (nominal) Current10 mA (idle, sleep mode not charging batteries);
3.5 A (average while printing);
450 mA (charging internal battery);
Up to 1.5 A (charging computer battery) Vibration 12 g RMS for 4 hours 126 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix A Specifications ESD 15 kV noncontact and 8 kV contact Battery Shelf Life 1 year at 25C (77 F) 2.3 Ah 12 V sealed lead-acid) Note: The battery goes dead within two weeks when connected to the printer and with no external charge source. Note: A printer and a computer, using the supplied serial cable, can operate up to 9 m (30 ft) apart. Printer Dimensions Listed below are the dimensions of the fixed mount and portable printers. Fixed Mount Printer The base of the fixed mount printer is 32.5 cm (12.75 in) wide by 35.5 cm (14.0 in) front to back. The upper portion varies according to the configurations shown in the following table. Fixed Mount Printer Dimensions Configuration
(with deep paper tray) with 61XX Holder Side Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Side Mount with 61XX Holder Top Mount with 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount Width 51.4 cm
(20.25 in) 47.0 cm
(18.5 in) 42.5 cm
(16.75 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) Length 36.8 cm
(14.5 in) 36.8 cm
(14.5 in) 42.6 cm
(16.75 in) 42.6 cm
(16.75 in) Depth 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 127 Appendix A Specifications Portable Printer The portable printer may come with a handle, an AC foot, or with a terminal holder top mount. Portable Printer Dimensions Width Configuration 41.9 cm with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray
(16.5 in) with handle, 61XX Holder Top Mount, Shallow Paper Tray 42.5 cm
(16.8 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) 41.9 cm
(16.5 in) with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount, and Deep Paper Tray with handle, 4000 Series, 62XX, 600 Series, or 700 Series, or CK60 Holder Top Mount or Fill Plate, and Shallow Paper Tray Length 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 42.6 cm
(16.8 in) 38.1 cm
(15.0 in) Depth 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 19.1 cm
(7.5 in) 20.3 cm
(8.0 in) 13.0 cm
(5.1 in) Note: The AC foot adds 6.35 cm (2.5 in) to the length of the printer. Media Specifications Using paper that matches the following specifications ensures optimum 6822 performance. Variation from these specifications, use of aged paper, or use of paper exposed to elements such as dirt or humidity may cause printing problems. The printer works with 1-3 ply carbonless paper that is single-edge glued and designed for sprocket feed. Standard paper size is 8.5 x 11 in or 241 x 305 mm international (8.5 x 12 in). Use 3-ply forms up to a maximum of 0.23 mm (0.009 in) thick. A soft, flexible, rubber type cement applied to one perforation strip only is preferred. The paper should wrap around a 1 1/4 in diameter roll without curl or wrinkle. 128 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Material Breakdown The following tables show the material broken down per ply:
14# CBF (Carbonless Back and Front) Appendix A Specifications Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 13.3 lb 2.6 4.0 110 220 86 Over 14.7 lb 3.2 6.0 230 320 90 Target 14 lb 2.9 5.0 165 270 88 15# CF (Carbonless Front) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 14.43 lb 2.5 4.0 100 100 84 Over 15.8 lb 3.2 6.0 180 180 86 Target 15 lb 3.0 5.0 140 140 85 16# CB (Carbonless Back) Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness (RS) Smoothness (CB) Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Colors available: White, Canary, Pink, Goldenrod, Blue, Green Under 15.2 lb 2.8 4.2 120 220 84 78.5 Over 16.8 lb 3.8 6.7 270 320 88 82 Target 16 lb 3.3 5.7 180 270 86 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 129 Appendix A Specifications 20# OCR Laser Bond Basis Weight Caliper Moisture Smoothness Brightness (Wht) Opacity (Wht) Target 20 lb 4.0 3.8 140 94 85 Under 15.2 lb 3.8 4.7 100 82 84 Over 16.8 lb 4.2 5.0 170 N/A N/A Caliper Breakdown The following table shows the caliper of forms broken down by ply:
Caliper Breakdown 1-Ply (20 lb) 2-Ply (15 lb and 16 lb) 3-Ply (14 lb, 15 lb, and 16 lb) Target 4.0 6.3 9.2 Maximum 4.2 7.0 10.2 130 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Understanding the Fanfold Paper Page Layout Appendix A Specifications The following illustration shows the printable area of the lower section of a page of fanfold paper and the upper section of the next page. The Assured Print Area is the best area to use for printing. Page width Assured Print Area 8 inches Max. Assured Print Area 55 lines max
(at 1/16 line spacing)
(area 2) 0.75 inch
(or more) Paper End Detection Position Perforation
...Xyz Abcdef...
(area 1) 1 inch 1 inch
(area 1) Abcdef... ..Xyz
(area 2) 0.75 inch
(or more)
(area 3) 1.833 inches
(11 lines) Printable Area of Fanfold Page You should leave a 1 in margin at both the top and the bottom of the page. This provides for a margin of six lines at 1/6 in line spacing. Even though printing in Area 1 (before or after the perforation) may be possible, you should keep in mind that paper feed precision is reliable only within the Assured Print Area. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 131 Appendix A Specifications The top and bottom margins are represented by Area 1, as shown in the previous illustration. The top margin is defined as the distance between the top edge of the paper and the first row of printed characters. The bottom margin is defined as the distance between the last row of printed characters and the bottom edge of the paper. There is a possibility that printing can start within one line below the perforation and printing could continue beyond the Assured Print Area, however paper feed precision is only reliable with top and bottom margins of approximately one inch. Basically, you should consider there are only 55 lines available for reliable printing. The left and right margins are represented by Area 2. For reliable printing, use a margin of at least 0.75 in for the left and right margins. The Paper End Detection line indicates the point where the Paper Out sensor detects the bottom edge of the paper. Area 3 represents the distance between the Paper End Detection position and the bottom edge of the page. Once the last page of the fanfold paper stack is in the printer, and the printhead has advanced past this Paper End Detection line, printing is no longer reliable. When the bottom end of the last page has advanced through the printer, past the spring plate along the front of the platen, the paper should not reverse back through the printer, because the printer could jam and cause paper feed problems. 132 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | User Manual part 4 | Users Manual | 1.07 MiB | January 05 2008 |
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Configuration of the Bluetooth radio and software is accomplished using the Bluetooth Configuration Commands listed in this appendix. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 133 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Using Configuration Commands an h suffix are in hexadecimal a 0x prefix are in hexadecimal a b suffix are in binary All printable characters can be entered directly via the keyboard. Any non-printable characters are entered in binary data format. Numbers are in decimal format except numbers with:
Binary data format is any non seven-bit ASCII data to transmit to the module is encoded in the Internet percent notation. Any hex byte to transmit is preceded by the % sign and encoded in hex ASCII. To send the value 0xF5, the %F5 bytes are transmitted. The %character is always transmitted as %25. Thus, a Bluetooth address could transmit as %00%E0%03%45%F4%6D. Generic format:
<command character><command type><command payload><CR>
<command character> is one character from the set: [A-Z]
<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]
<command payload> is variable in length.
<CR> is the command terminator. The <command payload> is formed from printable ASCII characters from the code range 0x20 to 0x7E. Codes outside of this range are escaped using the percent (%) character followed by two hexadecimal digits. The percent character is always represented by the three characters %25. The command terminator is character code 0x13 (carriage return), or character code 0x10 (line feed), or character codes 0x13, 0x10 (carriage return, line feed). An example command to set the friendly name to Lens 100% serial module:
F0Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>
Character codes outside of the range of 0x20 to 0x7E are ignored. When using percent (%) to form hexadecimal character codes there must be exactly two hex digits using characters: [0-9, A-F, a-f]. Characters outside of this range cause the command to fail. 134 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Commands that fail return the four character sequence NAK<CR>
Commands that are accepted return the four character sequence ACK<CR>
Commands that return payload data use the format:
<command character><command type><command payload><CR>
<command character> is one character from the set: [a-z]
<command type> is one character for the set: [0-9]
<command payload> is variable in length.
<CR> is the command terminator. The command character is the lower case version of the local host command. Operating Modes The module interface has two modes:
Bluetooth Link Active State In this case the Serial Interface looks like a raw serial port (TxD, RxD, CTS, etc. and GND). There is no intelligence in the Bluetooth module from the serial interface perspective. This mode does not support the command and control modes described below. Bluetooth Link Inactive State This mode exists when a Bluetooth link does not exist. In this case, the serial interface looks like a serial port that supports a number of command and control modes. On reset, the unit comes up in Bluetooth Link Inactive state. After the first Bluetooth connection, the unit goes into Bluetooth Link Active state. It stays in this state until the link is lost because the Master shuts it down or there is an out-of-range condition, it then returns to the Bluetooth Link Inactive state. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 135 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Command and Control Modes Query Mode Commands Example Commands Command
?<CR>
?F0<CR>
?L<CR>
?C0<CR>
?C1<CR>
?D0<CR>
?D1<CR>
?S1<CR>
?S2<CR>
?S4<CR>
?T0<CR>
?B0<CR>
Command
?<CR>
?F0<CR>
?L<CR>
?C0<CR>
?C1<CR>
?D0<CR>
?D1<CR>
?S1<CR>
?S2<CR>
?S4<CR>
?T0<CR>
?B0<CR>
Function Read ACK Read Friendly Name Read Security Mode Read Connectable Mode Read Page Scan Timing Read Discoverable Mode Read Inquiry Scan Timing Read Class of Device Read Service Name Read PIN Code Read Shutdown Timeout in minutes Read Bluetooth Addresses of all the paired devices Reply ACK<CR>
f0MyFriendlyName<CR>
10<CR> Turn off Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusion 11<CR> Authentication 12<CR> Encryption and Authentication 13<CR> Encryption, Authentication, and Exclusive c0ON<CR>
c11024,512<CR>
d0ON<CR>
d11024,512<CR>
s1001F00<CR>
s2MyServiceName<CR>
s4MyPinCode<CR>
t0Shutdown Timer = 5 minutes<CR>
b0No Devices PairedCR>
136 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Note: These commands are only available over the serial link, not over the air and are not available when the device is in the Bluetooth Link Active State. Set Local Bluetooth Device Name Command Definition Default Example F0<Device Friendly Name><CR>
Device Name String up to 254 bytes long 6822-DDEEFF where DDEEFF is from the
(AABBCCDDEEFF) Bluetooth device address F01Lens 100%25 serial module<CR>
This sets the name to Lens 100% serial module. Set Class of Device/Service Field Command Description Example S1< Class of Device/Service field >
The Class of Device/Service (CoD) field is a 24-bit field defined in the Bluetooth Assigned Numbers document. This field is sent in a HEX ASCII format, most significant byte first. S1001F00<CR> is a common Class of Device value for a basic serial device. Set Service Name Command Description Definition Default Example S2<Service Name>
Sets the service friendly name to send to the remote Bluetooth device in response to a service discovery request. The length of the service name is limited to 32 bytes. Profile Name text name entered into the SDP record for the serial port profile Wireless Printer S3Acme Printer<CR>
Connectable On/Off Command Description C0 <ON|OFF><CR>
Sets the device into connectable mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 137 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Example C0OFF<CR> Become non-connectable C0ON<CR> Become connectable Specify Page Scan Timing Command Description Default Example C1<Page_Scan_Interval>,<Page_Scan_Window><
CR>
Sets the Page Scan timing parameters 4096,18 C11024,512<CR>
Note: To enable scanning, the values for Interval and Window must be in the range of 18 to 4096. The Window value must be less than the Interval value. Both values must be zero to disable scanning. Note: Modifying Page Scan Timing can improve connection times, but may adversely affect battery performance. Enable Discoverable Command Description Example D0 <ON|OFF><CR>
Sets the device into discoverable mode D0OFF<CR> Become non-discoverable D0ON<CR> Become discoverable Specify Inquiry Scan Timing Command Description Default Example D1<Inquiry_Scan_Interval>,<
Inquiry_Scan_Window><CR>
Sets the Inquiry Scan timing parameters 4096,18 D11024,512<CR>
138 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Encryption/Authentication: PIN CODE Command Description Default Example S4<PIN code>
PIN Code Pin code can be NULL and as long as 16 characters S4%00 NULL PIN code S4MyPinCode <CR>
Manage Security Modes This command controls the security access mode and device pairing. The modes available are:
L0 Disable encryption, authentication and exclusion L1 Enable authentication L2 Enable encryption and authentication L3 Enable encryption, authentication and exclusive Mode L0 allows any remote device to connect. Mode L1 require the remote device to be authenticated by a PIN request. The PIN code for the module is set to a userspecified value with the S4 command. Currently the default PIN is the NULL string. Mode L2 adds encryption to the Bluetooth link. Mode L3 adds exclusive connection to one specific Bluetooth device. In this mode only connection requests from the initial device are allowed. Connections from other devices are rejected even if they supply the correct PIN code. Device pairing and bonding are associated with this command and works as follows:
After an L command is executed the current device pairing and bonding is deleted. The next device to connect becomes paired and bonded to the module. In Modes L1 and L2, other devices are allowed to connect but only the first device to connect is paired and bonded. Other devices are always required to supply a PIN code to complete the connection. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 139 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications In Mode L3, only one device is allowed to connect. This device is paired and bonded and needs to supply the PIN code only on the initial connection. Note: Some of the Bluetooth user interfaces cannot supply a NULL string as a PIN code. Use the S4 command to specify a PIN code that is not NULL. Read Module Version Command Description V0<CR>
Displays the firmware build version currently running V0<CR>
Returns: v1yyyymmddHHMM<CR>
Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example Read Local Device Address Command Description Returns V1<CR>
Displays the local device address v1%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx%xx<CR>
Note: This command responds with the requested data, only not the ACK<CR>. Example:
Sent: V1<CR>
Received: v1%00%2C%C6%03%45%39 140 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Set Shutdown Timing Command Description Range Default Example T0<Time in Minutes><CR>
Time Integer value 0 implies never expire the timer 0-270 minutes 120 T0120<CR> This sets the shutdown timer to 120 minutes. Clear Link Key Table Command Description Default Example B0<CLR><CR>
Clear Pair or Bonding command cleans up all of the link key and Bluetooth address combination PSKEYs. None B0CLR<CR> This clears all saved link keys. Understanding Adapter States or Modes The Bluetooth adapter connects to an internal serial port of the 6822, providing serial print data over a transparent Bluetooth link, running a Serial Port Profile (SPP). Printing is primarily accomplished over a Bluetooth link using the SPP protocol with a 700 Series or CK60 Mobile Computer. If the relevant printer configuration allows it, a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder charges normally. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 141 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Bluetooth adapter allows for four states or modes to be available. Each state is dependent upon either the pin states on the terminal holder connector or the programming connector on the adapter described later. Bluetooth Adapter States or Modes State State/mode 1 2 Bluetooth Printing Passthrough printing HHC_A/B pin 0 0 HHC_DTR pin 0 1 3 4 Bluetooth Reconfiguration Bluetooth programming cabled 1 X 0 X Comments Bluetooth printing/Bluetooth self-test Printing from 700 Series or CK60s allowed to pass through the Bluetooth adapter transparently. Reconfiguring Bluetooth module via 700 Series or CK60s. Programming Bluetooth module via programming cable State 1 - In addition to allowing normal Bluetooth printing, this state also allows for a 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder to perform a Bluetooth self-test. State 2 is a Transparent Pass Through mode available for all 700 Series and CK60s. During this mode, the Bluetooth module is shut down and does not communicate. State 3 (Bluetooth reconfiguring using a 700 Color (730, 740, 741, 750, 751, 760, 761) or CK60). This state is unavailable when a 700 Monochrome (705, 710, 720) is used, since the A/B pin is unavailable. State 4 allows for programming the Bluetooth module via its SPI pins. This state is also used for manufacturing tests. To be in this state, the 700 Series or CK60 must not have an open terminal holder COM port and the specially designed programming adapter must be engaged. The interfaces on the Bluetooth adapter that allow for the different modes are detailed below:
142 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications 700 Series or CK60 to 6822 Pass Through Note: Pass through printing requires shutting down the Bluetooth portion of the adapter. To reenable Bluetooth functionality after you finish pass through printing, press a button on the control panel to wake the printer. When DTR on the 700 Series or CK60 is set, the adapter board automatically opens a path between the 700 Series of CK60 and the 6822 Transition/DC Board and powers down the Bluetooth module. Testing the DSR pin to reflect DTR allows the mobile computer to differentiate between a Bluetooth-equipped terminal holder and a non-Bluetooth equipped terminal holder. 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to Bluetooth Module Communication Interface The Bluetooth adapter allows a 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 to communicate directly with the Bluetooth module under two circumstances. When the configuration settings of the Bluetooth module are to print. When the Bluetooth module requires reconfiguration. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 143 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Power Management Flow Diagram Bluetooth Power Management Flow Diagram 144 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Radio Power On/Off Mechanism Note: The shutdown timer configuration is addressed in Appendix A Bluetooth Configuration Commands. As stated earlier, the Bluetooth adapter, including the Bluetooth radio shuts down after a configurable time (default is two hours of idle time). To wake the Bluetooth adapter, the 6822 is powered on by any button push on the printer control panel. There are two ways to shutdown the Bluetooth module power:
A 700 Series, CK60, or CN3 initiates a pass through mode, or The Bluetooth module sends a shutdown signal after a configurable amount of time. Default is two hours of idle time. Note: The adapter complies with Bluetooth 1.1 specification, including bonding for authentication and enabling encryption. Persistent Storage These settings do not reset after a coldboot is performed on the printer:
Bluetooth Bonding Enable/Disable Bluetooth Encryption Enable/Disable Bluetooth Passkey Bluetooth Bonding List (Link Keys) Bluetooth Device Name Bluetooth Class of Device Discoverable setting Connectable setting Radio Shutdown Timer Timeout (default two hours of idle time) System Behavior/Software Considerations Discoverability The default mode is Discoverable. When configured to be discoverable, the adapter is discoverable at all times, except when:
an active Bluetooth connection exists 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 145 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default shutdown time is two hours). Connectability The default mode is connectable. When configured to be connectable, the printer is connectable at all times, except when:
an active Bluetooth connection exists you have just completed a pass-through printing print job the shutdown time has elapsed (default is two hours). Link Loss The 6822 Bluetooth adapter is able to recover from broken Bluetooth connections, including out-of-range, interference, power failure, or other conditions resulting in a broken connection. It returns to its previous Discoverable/Connectable state after a lost connection. Master/Slave Printer participates in a Bluetooth connection as the slave device. The Class of Device is 0x040680 which translates to a Service Class of Rendering, a Major Device Class of Imaging, and a Minor Device Class of Printer. The 6822 Bluetooth includes an SDP record that allows the printer to report an SPP instance with a service name of Wireless Printer. The default Bluetooth device name is 6822-DDEEFF, where DDEEFF matches the respective portion of the Bluetooth device address (AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF). If the printer the adapter is connecting to is known, the service name is changed to 6822-SN, where SN is replaced with the serial number of the 6822. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter can save 16 link keys across cold boots. Link keys are saved in a circular list. The 17th link key replaces the first, the 18th replaces the 2nd, and so on. Remote Configuration You can query the following items:
Discoverable State [Get/Set]
Connectable State [Get/Set]
146 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Bondable State [Get/Set] (Authentication) Encryption State [Get/Set]
Device Name [Get/Set]
Device Address[Get]
Class of Device[Get/Set]
Service Name [Get/Set]
Bluetooth Profile [Get]
Bluetooth Passkey [Set] (Get the fact that it is set) Radio Shutdown Timeout Bluetooth Performance Range Operating range is expected to range from a minimum separation of 10 cm to over 10 m with a 700 Color or CK60. Link Loss can occur when going in or out of range while communicating with other Bluetooth devices. Diagnostics Capabilities The Bluetooth radio settings are available to a user. The 6822 Bluetooth adapter sends a printout of Bluetooth information to the printer upon receiving a message from a 700 Series or CK60 in a terminal holder. An example self-test is shown below:
6822 Bluetooth Adapter Firmware:Version YYYY MMDD HHMM Bluetooth Configuration:
Device Address:0002371A0FD3 Device Name:6822-9843252 Discoverable:Yes Connectable:Yes Authentication:No Encryption:No Passkey:Not Applicable (or Key present if Authentication is enabled) Stored Link Keys:2 of 16 Power Management:
Shut Off Timer:120 minutes 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 147 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications The Passkey entry either states Not Applicable or Key Present depending on the Authentication state. Applications A 6822 Bluetooth Information application that prints the Bluetooth self-
test information on the 6822 can be installed on your 700 Series or CK60. To use the Bluetooth Information application 1 Insert the 700 Series or CK60 in the terminal holder on the 6822. 2 Tap the Start > Programs > the 6822 BT Information icon on your 700 Series or CK60 computer. 3 Press the Set Page button on the printer control panel to wake the printer. 4 From the 6822 Bluetooth Self-Test screen, tap the Trigger Self Test button to print the information. 148 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications System Qualification Operation Resilience Normal operation of the Bluetooth system is available in environments with radio backbones, including 802.11b, Spectrum 24, and OpenAir technologies. Environmental Specifications Temperature Operating Temperature -20 to 60C (-4 to 140F) Storage Temperature -30 to 70C (-22 to 158F). Temperature Test Results Test Operating Cold to Hot Transition Operating Hot to Cold Transition Humidity Operating Storage Range
-20C to 50C
(-4F to 122F) 50C to 20C
(122F to -4F) Comments External condensation allowed, internal prohibited Speed shall not degrade 5% to 95% RH non-condensing 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation 90% 25 to 60C (48 to 140F) no condensation Altitude
-100 to 5000 meters Vibration Test Results Test Quasi-Random 3 axis Dynamic Induced Shock Operating Storage When packed Frequency Acceleration Comments 12 g RMS, for 4 hours 20 g on 3 axis 1 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 3 G 5 Hz to 80 Hz 5 to 55 Hz 2 G 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 149 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Vibration Test Results (continued) Test Sweep Duration Directions Comments 10 minutes (half cycle) 1 hour x, y, and z No external or internal damage should be found after the vibration test, and the unit should operate normally. Unpackaged Drop 2 feet to concrete Terminal Inspection Minimum of 30,000 insertions for the terminal holder. Safety/Regulatory/Agency Requirements The Bluetooth adaptor must meet the electrical safety requirements for Information Technology Equipment. The test configuration must include a portable computer connected to the 6822, continuously printing the letter H. At least 6dB of margin below the relevant limits must be demonstrated. Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements Option Product Safety Requirement UL Listed per UL 1950 / UL 60950 (printer and AC power supply) CSA C22.2, No. 950 TUV/GS License per EN 60950 (printer, AC power supply) CB Report for EN 60950 covering all country deviations (Printer, ac power supply) UL 2089 (for cigarette lighter-style adapters) SAE J1113 or ISO 7637 FCC Class B (US); Industry Canada ICES-003 Class B (Canada) CISPR 22 Class B, including telecom port conducted (Europe) AS/NZS 3548 (Australia/New Zealand); CNS 13438 (Taiwan) IEC 61000-4-2Electrostatic Discharge IEC 61000-4-3Radiated RF Field Vehicle Power Interfaces EMC Digital device radiated and conducted emissions EN 55024 Immunity
(Europe) 150 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Safety, Regulatory, Agency Requirements (continued) Option EMC (continued) Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Requirement IEC 61000-4-4Electrical Fast Transients IEC 61000-4-5Surge IEC 61000-4-6Conducted RF IEC 61000-4-8Magnetic Field IEC 61000-4-11Voltage Dips and Interrupts (AC printers only). IEC 61000-3-2 (per Amendment 14) Class A if under 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value, Class D if over 70 Watts loaded to 90% of rated value IEC 61000-3-3 Voltage Fluctuation and Flicker. Bluetooth Radio - Modular radio approval is required. BT SIG approval is not mandatory but BT SIG GAP and SPP conformance is a prerequisite. FCC Part 15.247 (US) RSS-210 (Canada - indoor operation, unlicensed. Outdoor operation IF restricted to 2.450-2.4835 GHz) RSS-139 (Canada - indoor/outdoor operation, licensed. 2.400-
2.4835GHz) RSS-102 (Canada) - RF Exposure/SAR. Keep antennas more than 8 inches from operator to avoid SAR testing EN 300 328-1 & -2; EN 300 489-1 & 17 (Europe). SCT (Mexico) IEC950 2nd Edition, 4th Amendment or IEC 60950 3rd Edition, resulting in a GS Mark and a CB Report addressing all country deviations S Mark for Argentina for any device connecting directly to the AC mains CCIB Approval for China for any device connecting directly to the AC mains Mexico NOM 19 as applicable AC power supply
(Europe) Radio Type Approval Additional Approvals 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 151 Appendix B Bluetooth Configuration Commands and Specifications Default Configuration Default Configurations Setting Bluetooth Authentication Discoverable Connectable Class of Device Service Name Device Name Baud Rate Data Bits Stop Bits Parity Handshaking Radio Shutdown Timeout Default Off True True 0x040680 Wireless Printer 6822-DDEEFF 19,200 8 1 None Hardware 120 minutes 152 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual C Cross-Reference Tables A set of cross-reference tables are provided to assist you in locating control codes and escape sequences. The default settings are also included. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 153 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences The following table contains a complete alphabetized list of control codes, including single character control codes and escape sequences, as an aid to locating the control codes defined in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitionsor detailed definitions of these control codes, refer to the pages shown in the Page column of this table. Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index Description A Absolute Print Position, Set B Backspace Beeper Category General Printer Control General Printer Control General Printer Control Bottom-Up Printing, Select General Printer Control Byte:
Double Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Multi-Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined C Cancel Line Carriage Return Channel:
General Printer Control General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 62
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 63 154 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 81 Character:
Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Disable Printing of Character Graphics Double Byte Character Sets Enable Printing of Character Graphics Multi-Byte Character Sets Print Character Graphics Select Default Character Set Select National Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 83
<Hyper link10>
page 87 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 155 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Single Byte Character Sets Category Char. Sets, User Defined User Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined Code Code page Selection Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Page
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 83
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88 156 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Condensed (compressed):
Cancel Condensed Mode Copy ROM to RAM Select Condensed Mode D Default Character Set, Select Define Intercharacter Space Define User-Defined Characters Delete Double:
Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Double Byte Character Sets Select Double Strike Mode Category Page Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 86 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 87 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 63 Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 82 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Sets, User Defined 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 157 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select Double Wide Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) E Elite Pitch, Select Emphasized Mode, Cancel Emphasized Mode, Select Expand:
Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Expand Printable Code Area Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) F Form Feed G General Printer Control Functions Graphics:
158 Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 88 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 62 General Printer Control General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Eight-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Reassign Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select High-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Double Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Low-Speed Quadruple Density Mode Graphics Functions Select Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Nine-Pin Graphics Modes Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Double Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Select 9-Pin Single Density Graphics Mode Graphics Functions Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Page
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 91
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 92
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 93
<Hyper link10>
page 90 H Half Speed:
6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 159 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Cancel Half-Speed Printing Category General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Horizontal:
Clear Horizontal Tabs Perform Horizontal Tab Set Horizontal Tabs I Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode, Set Intercharacter Space, Define Italic:
Cancel Italic Mode Select Italic Mode L Left Margin, Set Length:
Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting Tabs and Tab Setting
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75
<Hyper link10>
page 70 Page Formatting Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 68 160 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Line, Cancel Line Feed:
Perform Line Feed Category General Printer Control General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Line Feed General Printer Control Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed General Printer Control Line Spacing:
Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69 M Margin:
Set Left Margin Set Right Margin Master Select Page Formatting Page Formatting
<Hyper link10>
page 70
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 161 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Master Reset, Perform Mode:
Cancel Condensed Mode (compressed) Cancel Double Strike Mode Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Cancel Emphasized Mode Cancel Italic Mode Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Cancel Underline Mode Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Double Strike Mode Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Category General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 71 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 162 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Description Select Emphasized Mode Select Elite Pitch Select Italic Mode Select Pica Pitch Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Select Underline Mode Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Multi-Byte Character Sets N National Character Set, Select O One Line Only:
Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Page Category Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 75 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 83 Char. Sets, User Defined Char. Sets, User Defined General Printer Control Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 67 General Printer Control 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 163 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description P Page:
Category Set Page Length (inches) Page Formatting Set Page Length (lines) Page Formatting Perforation:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 70 Pitch:
Select Elite Pitch Select Pica Pitch Position:
Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control Print:
Cancel Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Disable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 90 164 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Category Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Bottom-Up Printing General Printer Control Select Half-Speed Printing General Printer Control Select Top-Down Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control Set Print Position (absolute) General Printer Control Set Print Position (relative) General Printer Control R Reset, Perform Master General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 66
<Hyper link10>
page 65 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 165 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Reverse n/216 inch Line Feed, Perform Category General Printer Control Right Margin, Set Page Formatting ROM to RAM, Copy Char. Sets, User Defined S Single Byte Character Sets Char. Sets, User Defined Skip:
Cancel Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Set Skip Over Perforation Page Formatting Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity Time for General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 82
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 70
<Hyper link10>
page 64 Space:
Define Intercharacter Space Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Page Formatting Page Formatting Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 74
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 68
<Hyper link10>
page 69
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Page Formatting Page Formatting 166 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Category Page Formatting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 69 Strike:
Cancel Double Strike Mode Select Double Strike Mode Subscript/Superscript:
Cancel Subscript/Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Select Superscript Mode Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 77 T Tab:
Clear Horizontal Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Horizontal Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 167 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Horizontal Tabs Category Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Time for Sleep Mode, Set Inactivity General Printer Control Top-Down Printing, Select General Printer Control Page
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 66 U Underline:
Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Unidirectional:
Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 78 Cancel Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing General Printer Control Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) General Printer Control User Defined Characters:
Copy ROM to RAM Char. Sets, User Defined Define User-Defined Characters Char. Sets, User Defined
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 67
<Hyper link10>
page 86
<Hyper link10>
page 86 168 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Disable Printing of Character Graphics Category Char. Sets, User Defined Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Char. Sets, User Defined Expand Printable Code Area Char. Sets, User Defined Print Character Graphics Char. Sets, User Defined Select Default Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined Select User-Defined Character Set Char. Sets, User Defined V Vertical:
Clear Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Clear Vertical Tabs in Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Perform Vertical Tab Tabs and Tab Setting Select Vertical Tab Channel Tabs and Tab Setting Set Vertical Tabs Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 89
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 88
<Hyper link10>
page 90
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 87
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 80
<Hyper link10>
page 81
<Hyper link10>
page 80 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 169 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Control Codes and Escape Sequences Index (continued) Description Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Category Tabs and Tab Setting Page
<Hyper link10>
page 81 W Wide:
Cancel Double Wide (expanded) Mode Cancel Double Wide Mode (one line only) Select Double Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double Wide Mode (one line only) Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 73 Char. Style & Text Mode <Hyper link10>
page 72 Single Character Control Code Definitions This table contains control codes between 00h and 7Fh, and provides definitions for the ASCII symbols as used in the table on the next page and in format definitions in Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Single Character Control Code Definitions Used as a terminator for several escape sequences. ASCII Description NUL SOH STX ETX EOT ENQ ACK BEL Hex 00 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 Dec 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 170 Beeper: sounds buzzer for 1/10 of a second. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 8 Hex 08 ASCII Description BS Backspace: moves printhead one space to left. 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 0E 0F 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 09 0A 0B HT Horizontal Tab: moves printhead to next tab stop. LF Line Feed: moves paper to next line. VT Vertical Tab: moves paper to next vertical tab stop 0C FF Form Feed: advances paper to top of next page. 0D CR Carriage Return: moves printhead to left margin. SO Shift Out: selects double-wide mode (one-line-only) SI Shift In: selects condensed (compressed) mode DLE DC1 DC2 DC3 DC4 Device Control 1: sets printer online (not currently used) Device Control 2: cancels condensed mode (compressed) <Hyper link10>
page 71 Device Control 3: sets printer offline (not currently used) Device Control 4: cancels double-wide mode (one line only) NAK SYN ETB CAN Cancel Line: clears all characters out of print buffer. Page
<Hyper link10>
page 62
<Hyper link10>
page 78
<Hyper link10>
page 65
<Hyper link10>
page 79
<Hyper link10>
page 64
<Hyper link10>
page 63
<Hyper link10>
page 72
<Hyper link10>
page 71
<Hyper link10>
page 73
<Hyper link10>
page 63 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 171 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Single Character Control Code Definitions (continued) Dec 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 127 Hex 19 1A 1B 1C 1D 1E 1F 20 7F ASCII Description EM SUB ESC FS GS RS US SP DEL Escape: defines start of escape sequence. Space Character Delete: deletes last character in print buffer. Page
<Hyper link10>
page 63 172 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference The following table is a quick reference between the escape sequences listed in ascending order, according to numeric values. For detailed definitions, see Chapter 5 Control Code Definitions. Escape Sequence Quick Reference Decimal ESC SO ESC SI ESC US (0) ESC US (1) ESC SP n ESC ! n ESC $ n1 n2 ESC % (0) ESC % (1) ESC & NUL k1 k2 s1 d1...d11 ESC * m n1 n2 ESC + n d1...dn ESC - 0*
ESC - 1*
ESC / c ESC 0 ESC 1 ESC 2 ESC 3 n ESC 4 ESC 5 ESC 6 ESC 7 ESC <
ESC : NUL NUL NUL ESC ? s n Description Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode (one line only) Select Condensed Mode (compressed) Select Top-Down Printing Select Bottom-Up Printing Define Inter-Character Space Master Select Set Print Position (absolute) Select Default Character Set Select User-Defined Character Set Define User-Defined Characters Select Graphics Mode Print Character Graphics Cancel Underline Mode Select Underline Mode Select Vertical Tab Channel Select 1/8 inch Line Spacing Select 7/72 inch Line Spacing Select 1/6 inch Line Spacing Select n/216 inch Line Spacing Select Italic Mode Cancel Italic Mode Enable Printing of Codes 128-255 Disable Printing of Codes 128-255 Select Unidirectional Printing (one line only) Copy ROM to RAM Reassign Graphics Mode 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 173 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC @
ESC A n ESC B NUL ESC B n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC C n ESC C NUL n ESC D NUL ESC D n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC E ESC F ESC G ESC H ESC I n ESC J n ESC K n1 n2 ESC L n1 n2 ESC M ESC N n ESC O ESC P ESC Q n ESC R n0 n1 n2 ESC R n ESC S 0*
ESC S 1*
ESC T ESC U 0*
ESC U 1*
ESC W 0*
ESC W 1*
ESC Y n1 n2 ESC Z n1 n2 Description Perform Master Reset Select n/72 inch Line Spacing Clear Vertical Tabs Set Vertical Tabs Set Page Length (lines) Set Page Length (inches) Clear Horizontal Tabs Set Horizontal Tabs Select Emphasized Mode Cancel Emphasized Mode Select Double-Strike Mode Cancel Double-Strike Mode Expand Printable Code Area Perform n/216 inch Line Feed Select Single-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Elite Pitch Set Skip Over Perforation Cancel Skip Over Perforation Select Pica Pitch Set Right Margin Code page Selection Select National Character Set Select Superscript Mode Select Subscript Mode Cancel Superscript/Subscript Mode Cancel Unidirectional Printing Select Unidirectional Printing Cancel Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select Double-Wide (expanded) Mode Select High-Speed Double-Density Graphics Mode Select Low-Speed Quadruple-Density Graphics Mode 174 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Escape Sequence Quick Reference (continued) Decimal ESC ^ (0) n1 n2 ESC ^ (1) n1 n2 ESC b c NUL ESC b c n1 n2 ... nk NUL ESC j n ESC l n ESC s 0*
ESC s 1*
ESC t (0) ESC t (1) ESC z n ESC \ n1 n2 Description Select 9-pin Single Density Graphics Mode Select 9-pin Double Density Graphics Mode Clear Vertical Tab Channel Set Vertical Tabs in Channel Perform n/216 inch Reverse Line Feed Set Left Margin Cancel Half-Speed Printing Select Half-Speed Printing Disable Printing of Character Graphics Enable Printing of Character Graphics Set Inactivity Time for Sleep Mode Set Print Position (relative) Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Factory-Installed Printer Defaults Function Carriage position Character set Code page Codes 128-255 Condensed (compressed) Double-Strike Double-Wide Emphasized Graphics mode Half-Speed printing Intercharacter space International character sets Italic Justification Default Value At left margin Normal (not user defined) 0 Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Disabled Not selected Disabled Zero (0) Disabled Disabled Left justification 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 175 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Factory-Installed Printer Defaults (continued) Function Keyboard, printer Language Line Spacing Margin, left Margin, right MSB control NLQ Page length Default Value Enabled USA 1/6 inch 0 80 Disabled Disabled 11 inch (66 lines with Pica pitch) Enabled Pica (10 characters per inch) 10 seconds Top-down, bidirectional Paper end sensor Pitch Power off sleep timer Printer Code Area Expansion Disabled Printing direction Redefinition of graphic modes Disabled Skip over perforation Disabled Disabled Subscript/Superscript Tabs, horizontal Set to default tabs (every 8 column) 1 line feed each tab, channel = 0 Set to current line Disabled Disabled (bidirectional) Removed Tabs, vertical Top of form Underline Unidirectional printing User defined character set The settings in the previous table are installed in the printer at the factory. To restore the printer to these defaults, see Reset Button on page 4 for instructions. The default settings listed below can be restored to the printer, as described in Chapter 4 Using the 6820 Printer Configuration Utility. 176 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Printer Default Settings Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables Function Zero print option Autofeed configuration Protocol Parity Bit Rate Default Value Zeros are printed with a slash CR (carriage return added at end of line without line feed) NPCP (NORAND Portable Communications Protocol) N/A (for NPCP) 19.2K 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 177 Appendix C Cross-Reference Tables 178 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual D Printer Font Test Jobs This appendix contains a sample print job for each font available on your 6822 printer. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 179 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs About the Printer Font Jobs You can perform these tests yourselves. Load the font of choice from the Toolkit CD into flash memory. After downloading the desired font, use any of the sample print jobs to reveal the character locations within the printer memory. The sample test print jobs are formatted as a memory mapped and could be referenced to select a desired character. These test print jobs originated from running a C program by a person with specific knowledge of how to generate such a report (print job). The C program demonstrates how a programmer could access the printer font modules within flash memory to select desired character. You do not need more than one font module loaded. Any ONE of:
nft00932.mod, nft00936.mod, nft00949.mod, or even nft00950.mod Asian fonts can be used. These are distributed via the NPTK6822 toolkit
(including the source code). These print jobs are in this appendix:
BIG5.C which creates BIG5950.TXT CHINA.C which creates GB2312.TXT IBM437.C which creates IBM437.TXT JAPAN.C which creates JIS932.TXT KOREA.C which creates KOREA.TXT NATION.C which creates NATION.TXT Big 5 Traditional Chinese Character Set This program generates a text file, big5950.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the BIG 5 traditional Chinese character set. Install the BIG 5 character font (nft00950.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have big5950.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl big5.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run big5.exe to create big5950.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 180 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall Simplified Chinese Character Set Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs This program generates a text file, gb2312.txt, that to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the Simplified Chinese character set. Install the Simplified Chinese character font (nft00936.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have gb2312.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl china.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run china.exe to create gb2312.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. IBM 437 Code Page Character Set This program generates a text file, ibm437.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the IBM 437 code page character set. Install the IBM 437 character font (nft00437.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have ibm437.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl ibm437.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run ibm437.exe to create ibm437.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Japanese (Shift JIS) Character Set This program generates a text file, jis932.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the JIS character set. Install the JIS character font (nft00932.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have jis932.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl japan.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run japan.exe to create jis932.txt. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 181 Appendix D Printer Font Test Jobs 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. Korean Character Set This program generates a text file, korea.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the use of the KSC5601 character set. Install the KSC5601 character font (nft00949.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have korea.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl korea.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run korea.exe to create korea.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. International Character Set This program generates a text file, nation.txt, to copy to a 6822. The text file illustrates the international character sets available for use in the default character set. Install the default character set font (nft00000.mod) using the Printer Configuration Utility. To have nation.txt print correctly 1 Use the Microsoft C version 7.00 compiler. cl nation.c /link slibce graphics 2 Run nation.exe to create nation.txt. 3 Copy this text file to the appropriate printer port. 182 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manuall I Index 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 183 Index Numerics 4000 Series Terminal Holder 2 61XX Terminal Holder 2 62XX Terminal Holder 2 700 series computer pinout configuration 122 inserting in terminal holder 17 A ActiveSync disabling 54 enabling 46 Alpha keyboard Windows 95/98 38 B Big 5 traditional Chinese character set 82 Bluetooth adapter applications 148 class of device 146 default device name 146 link keys 146 link loss 146, 147 master/slave 146 performance range 147 query items 146 SDP record 146 self-test 147 Bluetooth Configuration Commands connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode commands 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 BM0_1_DI7ZVP_ZBNA0B_7SKU RH_2 2 Buffers I/O buffer 58 print (image) buffer 58 C Cables 15pin to 25pin 25pin to 15pin 25pin to 25pin 120 9pin to 15pin 121 Change configuration parameters error messages 54 Windows 95/98 37 Chinese Character sets Big 5 traditional 82 GB 2312 82 Code page file Class of device Greek 85 Hebrew 83 international 83 Japanese, shift JIS 82 Korean, KSC5601 82 Bluetooth adapter 146 NFT00932.MOD, 932 file 82 NFT00936.MOD, 936 file 82 NFT00949.MOD, 949 file 82 NFT00950.MOD, 950 file 82 connectable on/off 137 manage security modes 139 query mode 136 specify inquiry scan timing 138 specify page scan timing 138 Communications connector pinouts Commands 123 Configuration ActiveSync installation setting 6820 printer configuration enabling 46, 54 Windows 95/98 28 overview of operation Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 2000/XP 49 Windows 2000/XP 46 Windows 95/98 29 Connectable on/off 137 Control code/escape sequence table working memory 154 Control codes crossreference tables control codes & escape sequences index 154 Copy fonts 184 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Windows 95/98 35 Crossreference tables index 154 control codes & escape sequences configuration file, default.pcf D Default printer settings Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 default.pcf default configuration Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Device name E Error messages printer settings Windows 2000/XP Escape sequence/control code table Escape sequences crossreference (to definitions) F Factory defaults Windows 95/98 Fixed mount printer description Flash space available Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Fonts copy Windows 95/98 Chinese character set G GB 2312 Greek character sets H Hebrew character sets Horizontal tabs Index perform perform horizontal tab I I/O buffer Image buffer Inactivity time set inactivity time for sleep mode Windows 95/98 Installation (configuration utility) International character set J Japanese character set (Shift JIS) K Korean character set (KSC5601) KSC5601 Korean character set L Line feed (LF) Line spacing perform line feed LINE FEED button setting paper for printing select 1/8inch line spacing Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter Link keys Link loss
, M Manage security modes Master/slave Modes Bluetooth adapter inactivity time for sleep mode N nft00932.mod nft00936.mod code page 932 code page 936 code page 949 code page 950 nft00949.mod nft00950.mod 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 185 Index nptk6820.exe toolkit self-extracting Windows 95/98 O Operation pinfeed holders
, P Parameters Windows 95/98 Portable printer description Print (image) buffer Print head printer alignment set to third notch Windows 95/98 Printer descriptions fixed mount portable Print head gap Printer default settings Printer mechanism alignment Printer problems Printer, get from (load configuration) Printer, save configuration to Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Programs, selftest control program verification Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Q Query items Query mode commands R Range Bluetooth adapter Reset button portable Windows 95/98 install Ribbon cartridge Restore defaults to printer rpgpconf.exe configuration utility, application Windows 95/98 rpgpconf.ini installation file Windows 95/98 S Save (update working configuration) SDP record Save to printer Windows 95/98 Windows 95/98 Bluetooth adapter Bluetooth adapter setting paper for printing SET PAGE button Setting 6820 printer configuration Selftest Windows 95/98 Settings, default Shift JIS, Japanese character set Sleep mode set inactivity time for sleep mode Sleep mode, set activity time for Space remaining in flash Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 Spacing, line select 1/8inch line spacing Specify inquiry scan timing Specify page scan timing T Tabs and tab setting functions perform horizontal tab horizontal tabs Terminal holder Time inserting 700 series computer set inactivity time for sleep mode Tool kit self-extracting archive file Windows 95/98 186 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Traditional, Bit 5, Chinese character set Troubleshooting Bluetooth adapter diagnostics possible printer problems POST error codes selftest U Utility, configuration Windows 95/98 installation operation Index Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 V Verifications Visible moving parts in mechanism printer components W Wall mount printer Working configuration Windows 2000/XP Windows 95/98 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual 187 Index 188 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com 2008 Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. 6822 Series 80-Column Printer Users Guide
*935-013-001*
P/N 935-013-001
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Users Manual | Users Manual | 2.45 MiB | / December 07 2007 |
Users Manual CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Intermec Technologies Corporation Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Ave.W. Everett, WA 98203 U.S.A. www.intermec.com The information contained herein is provided solely for the purpose of allowing customers to operate and service Intermec-manufactured equipment and is not to be released, reproduced, or used for any other purpose without written permission of Intermec Technologies Corporation. Information and specifications contained in this document are subject to change without prior noticed and do not represent a commitment on the part of Intermec Technologies Corporation. 2007 by Intermec Technologies Corporation. All rights reserved. The word Intermec, the Intermec logo, Norand, ArciTech, Beverage Routebook, CrossBar, dcBrowser, Duratherm, EasyADC, EasyCoder, EasySet, Fingerprint, i-gistics, INCA (under license), Intellitag, Intellitag Gen2, JANUS, LabelShop, MobileLAN, Picolink, Ready-to-Work, RoutePower, Sabre, ScanPlus, ShopScan, Smart Mobile Computing, SmartSystems, TE 2000, Trakker Antares, and Vista Powered are either trademarks or registered trademarks of Intermec Technologies Corporation. There are U.S. and foreign patents as well as U.S. and foreign patents pending. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. ii CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Contents Contents Before You Begin. vii Safety Information . vii Global Services and Support. viii Warranty Information . viii Web Support . viii Telephone Support . ix Who Should Read This Manual . ix Related Documents . x Other Copyright Information. x Patent Information . xi 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer . 1 Introducing the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer. 2 Using the Battery . 4 Charging and Installing the Battery . 5 Maximizing Battery Life . 6 Checking the Battery Status . 6 Understanding the Low Battery Warnings . 7 Using the Keypad . 8 Using the Color-Coded Keys . 10 Capitalizing All Characters . 11 Using the Power Button . 11 Understanding the Status Lights . 12 Using the Touch Screen . 14 Using the Stylus . 15 Aligning the Screen. 15 About the Audio System . 16 Understanding the Audio Feedback. 16 Scanning Bar Codes . 18 Enabling or Disabling Symbologies . 19 Scanning a Bar Code Label to Verify Scanner Operation . 19 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual iii Contents 2 Understanding Windows Mobile . 23 Understanding Windows Mobile . 24 Finding Information in Windows Mobile . 24 Learning the Basic Skills . 25 Using the Today Screen . 25 Accessing Programs. 26 Closing an Application . 26 Using the Navigation Bar and the Command Bar. 26 Using Pop-Up Menus. 27 Entering Information . 27 Using Transcriber . 29 Finding and Organizing Information . 30 Customizing the CK32 I-Safe . 30 Using Microsoft ActiveSync. 32 Using Internet Explorer Mobile . 34 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe. 35 Configuring the Operating Parameters. 36 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using Intermec Settings . 36 Remotely Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using SmartSystems Foundation . 37 Setting Up Ethernet Communications. 37 Setting Up Bluetooth Communications. 39 Configuring Bluetooth Communications for Wireless Printing . 41 Creating an Application That Lets You Print Wirelessly . 41 Selecting the Current Wireless Printer on the CK32 I-Safe . 42 Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device . 45 Setting Up 802.11 Radio Communications . 45 Configuring the Network Parameters for a TCP/IP Network . 46 Configuring the Network Parameters for a UDP Plus Network. 47 Checking the Status of Your Wireless Connection . 47 Using ISpyWiFi. 48 Starting the Utility . 48 ISpyWiFi . 49 WiFi Scan. 51 Supplicant. 52 Ping . 54 iv CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Contents Supplicant Logging . 55 Configuring Security on the CK32 I-Safe . 56 Understanding the Wireless Network . 57 Using WPA Security. 57 Using Static WEP Security . 58 Using 802.1x Security. 59 Using LEAP Security . 59 Choosing Between Funk and Microsoft Security . 60 Configuring Funk Security Using Intermec Settings . 60 Configuring Funk Security Using the Profile Wizard. 65 Configuring EAP-FAST with Profile Wizard . 72 Configuring Microsoft Security . 73 Loading a Certificate . 76 Disabling Security . 79 4 Developing and Installing Applications . 81 Developing Applications for the CK32 I-Safe . 82 Developing a New Application Using the Intermec Developer Library . 82 Developing a Web-Based Application . 83 Converting a Trakker Antares Application for the CK32 I-Safe . 83 Installing Applications on the CK32 I-Safe . 84 Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation. 85 Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync . 85 Installing Applications Using Wavelink Avalanche . 87 Launching An Application Automatically . 90 RunAutoRun . 90 AutoExec . 91 AutoRun. 93 AutoCopy. 95 AutoReg . 96 AutoCab. 97 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance. 99 Upgrading the CK32 I-Safe Using SmartSystems . 100 Contacting Product Support . 103 Troubleshooting the CK32 I-Safe . 104 Problems While Operating the CK32 I-Safe. 104 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual v Problems While Configuring Security . 106 Problems with Wireless Connectivity . 107 Resetting Your Computer . 110 Preferred Reset Method . 110 Secondary Reset Method . 110 Performing a Clean Boot . 111 Cleaning the Scanner Window, Screen, and Computer . 111 Cleaning the Scanner Window and Screen . 112 Cleaning the Handle and Computer . 112 A Specifications . 115 Physical and Environmental Specifications. 116 Physical Dimensions . 116 Weight . 116 Power Specifications . 116 Electrical Specifications. 116 Temperature and Humidity Specifications . 116 LCD Touch Screen Specifications. 116 Keypad Options . 117 Bar Code Symbologies . 117 Linear Imager Reading Distances . 118 Accessories . 122 AN1 Communications Adapter (P/N 871-223-xxx) . 122 AC11 Quad Battery Charger (P/N 852-914-xxx) . 122 Handle (P/N 714-625-xxx). 122 Hand Strap (P/N 825-183-xxx) . 122 Carrying Strap Kit (P/N 825-186-xxx) . 123 AB6 Battery Pack (P/N 318-021-xxx). 123 Tethered Stylus (P/N 203-828-xxx) . 123 Battery Eliminator (P/N 714-619-xxx) . 123 Power Supply (P/N 851-061-xxx). 123 Screen Protector (P/N 346-065-004) . 123 Index . 125 vi CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Before You Begin Before You Begin This section provides you with safety information, technical support information, and sources for additional product information. Safety Information Your safety is extremely important. Read and follow all warnings and cautions in this document before handling and operating Intermec equipment. You can be seriously injured, and equipment and data can be damaged if you do not follow the safety warnings and cautions. This section explains how to identify and understand dangers, warnings, cautions, and notes that are in this document. You may also see icons that tell you when to follow ESD procedures and when to take special precautions for handling optical parts. A warning alerts you of an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to avoid death or serious injury to the persons working on the equipment. A caution alerts you to an operating procedure, practice, condition, or statement that must be strictly observed to prevent equipment damage or destruction, or corruption or loss of data. Note: Notes either provide extra information about a topic or contain special instructions for handling a particular condition or set of circumstances. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual vii Before You Begin The Intermec Models CK32 I-Safe, AB6 Battery Pack, AN1 Communications Adapter, and AC11 Battery Charger contain no user serviceable components. Return these models ONLY to Intermec Authorized Service Centers for Repair. Intrinsic Safety Certifications and Warranties will be void if these models are opened or serviced at locations not certified by Intermec. Only Intermec provided spare parts should be used in the repair of the CK32 I-Safe and accessory products. Immediately remove from service any product that exhibits physical damage. Wired connections to the CK32 I-Safe must only be made through a model AN1 Communications Adapter. Verify that the CK32 I-Safe is appropriately rated for your hazardous location before use. Consult your Safety Department for assistance. Use of any accessories not supplied and approved by Intermec could compromise safety. Global Services and Support Warranty Information To understand the warranty for your Intermec product, visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com and click Service &
Support > Warranty. Web Support Visit the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com to download our current manuals (in PDF). To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledge Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support for your Intermec product. viii CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Before You Begin In the USA and Canada call 1-800-
755-5505 and choose this option 1 and then choose 2 1 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 4 2 and then choose 2 2 and then choose 1 1 or 2 and then choose 3 Telephone Support These services are available from Intermec. Services Order Intermec products Order Intermec media Order spare parts Technical Support Service Service contracts Description Place an order. Ask about an existing order. Order printer labels and ribbons. Order spare parts. Talk to technical support about your Intermec product. Get a return authorization number for authorized service center repair. Request an on-site repair technician. Ask about an existing contract. Renew a contract. Inquire about repair billing or other service invoicing questions. Outside the U.S.A. and Canada, contact your local Intermec representative. To search for your local representative, from the Intermec web site, click Contact. Who Should Read This Manual The CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual is for the person who is responsible for installing, configuring, and maintaining the CK32 I-Safe. Before you work with the CK32 I-Safe, you should be familiar with your network and general networking terms, such as IP address. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual ix Before You Begin Related Documents The Intermec web site at www.intermec.com contains our documents (in PDF) that you can download for free. To order printed versions of the Intermec manuals, contact your local Intermec representative or distributor. Other Copyright Information Microsoft, Windows, and the Windows logo are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation in the United States and/or other countries. Bluetooth is a trademark of Bluetooth SIG, Inc., U.S.A. Wi-Fi is a registered certification mark of the Wi-Fi Alliance. This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for use in the OpenSSL Toolkit.
(http://www.openssl.org/) This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young. (eay@cryptsoft.com) This product uses Regex++, Index software during its operational phases. The owner of Regex++ has granted use of the software to anyone provided such use is accompanied by the following copyright and permission notice:
Regex++, Index. (Version 3.31, 16th Dec. 2001) Copyright 1998-2001 Dr. John Maddock Permission to use, copy, modify, distribute and sell this software and its documentation for any purpose is hereby granted without fee, provided that the above copyright notice appear in all copies and that both that copyright notice and this permission notice appear in supporting documentation. Dr. John Maddock makes no representations about the suitability of this software for any purpose. It is provided as is without express or implied warranty. x CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Patent Information This product is covered by one or more of the following US Patents and corresponding international patents worldwide:
4894523, 4953113, 4961043, 4970379, 4988852, 5019699, 5021642, 5038024, 5081343, 5095197, 5144119, 5144121, 5182441, 5187355, 5187356, 5195183, 5216233, 5216550, 5195183, 5195183, 5218191, 5227614, 5233172, 5241488, 5243602, 5258606, 5278487, 5288985, 5308966, 5322991, 5331136, 5331580, 5342210, 5349678, 5359185, 5371858, 5373478, 5389770, 5397885, 5410141, 5414251, 5416463, 5442167, 5464972, 5468947, 5468950, 5477044, 5486689, 5488575, 5500516, 5502297, 5504367, 5508599, 5514858, 5530619, 5534684, 5536924, 5539191, 5541419, 5548108, 5550362, 5550364, 5565669, 5567925, 5568645, 5572007, 5576529, 5592512, 5594230, 5598007, 5608578, 5616909, 5619027, 5627360, 5640001, 5657317, 5659431, 5671436, 5672860, 5684290, 5719678, 5729003, 5742041, 5761219, 5764798, 5777308, 5777309, 5777310, 5786583, 5793604, 5798509, 5798513, 5804805, 5805807, 5811776, 5811777, 5818027, 5821523, 5828052, 5831819, 5834753, 5834749, 5837987, 5841121, 5842070, 5844222, 5854478, 5862267, 5869840, 5873070, 5877486, 5878395, 5883492, 5883493, 5886338, 5889386, 5892971, 5895906, 5898162, 5902987, 5902988, 5912452, 5923022, 5936224, 5949056, 5969321, 5969326, 5969328, 5979768, 5986435, 5987192, 5987499, 5992750, 6003775, 6012640, 6016960, 6018597, 6024289, 6034379, 6859190, 6064763, 6075340, 6095422, 6097839, 6102289, 6102295, 6109528, 6119941, 6128414, 6138915, 6149061, 6149063, 6152370, 6155490, 6158661, 6164542, 6164545, 6173893, 6195053, 6234393, 6234395, 6244512, 6249008, 6328214, 6330975, 6345765, 6356949, 6367699, 6375075, 6375076, 6375344, 6431451, 6435411, 6484944, 6488209, 6497368, 6532152, 6538413, 6539422, 6621942, 6641046, 6681994, 6687403, 6688523, 6732930, 6036093, 6039252, 6889903, 6967280, 7027037, 7035466, 7090137, 7121467 There may be other U.S. and foreign patents pending. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual xi xii CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Introducing the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Use this chapter to familiarize yourself with the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Using the Battery Using the Keypad Understanding the Status Lights Using the Touch Screen About the Audio System Understanding the Audio Feedback Scanning Bar Codes CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 1 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Introducing the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer The Intermec CK32 I-Safe is an ergonomically designed handheld computer built on the Microsoft Windows Mobile operating system. It is a easy-to-use, reliable computer that runs client/server and browser-based applications and is certified to be intrinsically safe. The CK32 I-Safe is designed to support world-wide intrinsic safety standards and comply with relevant European Directives. Testing and certification requires meeting the standards of Underwriters Laboratories, ATEX directives in Europe and IEC standards in the rest of the world. Scanner window Scan button Backlight Power Communications port Battery CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computers with an IEEE 802.11b/g radio installed are Wi-Fi certified for interoperability with other 802.11b/g wireless LAN devices. 2 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer The CK32 I-Safe includes these features:
PXA270 Intel Processor Windows Mobile 5.0 Operating System Voice over IP support. User responsible for software integration. Bluetooth support for scanner, RFID, Voice 128 MB DRAM, 64 MB Flash 512 MB embedded SD Mass Storage Card Intrinsic safety certification for North America, Europe and countries accepting IECEx Scheme European directive compliance These options are available for the CK32 I-Safe:
TE 2000 terminal emulation application including 3270, 5250, and VT/ANSI as well as support for third-party TE applications Data Collection Browser (dcBrowser) application Use this manual to understand how to use the features and options available on the CK32 I-Safe. For additional help using terminal emulation, see the TE 2000 Terminal Emulation Programmers Guide (P/N 977-055-xxx). For additional help using dcBrowser, see the documentation that ships with the dcBrowser gateway software or the Data Collection Browser Client Users Guide (P/N 070-011-xxx). iBrowse is a locked-down web browser for Intermec devices that is compatible with Microsofts Internet Explorer but does not allow the user to exit the browser or access non-work related web sites. For additional help using iBrowse, see the iBrowse Users Guide (P/N 961-055-xxx). For a complete list of accessories, see Accessories on page 122. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 3 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Using the Battery The CK32 I-Safe uses a model AB6 (P/N 318-021-xxx) lithium-
ion battery as its main power source. You must fully charge the main battery before you can use the CK32 I-Safe. When you change the battery, a backup battery maintains your status, memory, and real-time clock for at least 10 minutes. You must suspend your CK32 I-Safe before removing the battery, or data loss may occur.. If the battery is at a critical level, you may not be able to boot the device. You must replace the battery with a fully charged battery The lithium-ion battery pack that is used in this device may present a fire or chemical burn hazard if it is mistreated. Do not disassemble it, heat it above 100C (212F) or incinerate it. When the battery reaches the end of its useful life, the spent battery should be disposed of by a qualified recycler or hazardous materials handler. Do not mix this battery with the solid waste stream. Contact your Intermec Technologies Service Center for recycling or disposal information. Note: In the U.S.A., the EPA does not consider spent lithium-ion batteries as hazardous waste. Li-ion Li-ion 4 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Charging and Installing the Battery Make sure you fully charge the AB6 battery before using your CK32 I-Safe. To charge the battery Insert the battery into the AC11 4-slot battery charger. Charging time is approximately 7 hours. To install the battery You must suspend your CK32 I-Safe before removing the battery, or data loss may occur. Insert the tabs on the bottom of the charged battery into the CK32 I-Safe and snap the battery into place. Speaker
(internal) Beeper Battery latch AB6 battery Inserting the AB6 Battery Explosion Hazard Use Intermec battery pack Model AB6 only. It is rated as Intrinsically Safe but it MUST NOT BE CHANGED while in a Class II or Class III environment. The battery can be changed in a Class 1 (gas) environment. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 5 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Maximizing Battery Life There are several things that you can do to extend the life of your fully charged battery. Verify that Radio Power Management is enabled (Fast PSP). Enabling radio power management allows your radio to switch between awake and sleep modes based on network traffic. If you use the default setting of disabled (CAM), you will have the best network performance (data throughput) but it will draw the most power from your battery. Verify that the backlight timeout is set to 15 seconds. Verify that each setting under Power Management (Device timeout, Screen timeout) has a value of 1 minute. You can use Intermec Settings to easily make all of these configuration changes. Checking the Battery Status You can check the battery status by looking at the Battery icon on the front of the CK32 I-Safe or by checking the Power Settings. Tap the Battery icon on the Status bar or use the following procedure to check the Power Settings on your CK32 I-Safe. Either method will take you to the Settings display which indicates the percent of battery charge remaining. To check the Power Settings 1 Tap Start. The Start menu appears. 2 Tap Settings > System. 3 Tap the Power icon. The Power Settings display appears. 6 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Understanding the Low Battery Warnings When the battery charge is getting low, you will receive an audible alert and an initial pop-up warning message with a blue border. The warning message indicates Main Battery Low. To prevent possible data loss, replace or recharge your battery according to the owners manual. A second battery icon with an !
inside also appears on the Status bar. If the first warning is not dismissed, it is followed by another audible alert and a second pop-up warning message with a red border. This message indicates Main Battery Very Low. To prevent possible data loss, replace or recharge your battery according to the owners manual. If the battery charge continues to drop, the red battery status LED blinks and the CK32 I-Safe enters Suspend mode. If the battery charge continues to drop, the battery status LED will stop blinking You can change the audible alert using the Sounds &
Notifications applet. To change the audible alert Tap Settings > Personal > Sounds & Notifications. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 7 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Using the Keypad Your CK32 I-Safe has one of the following keypad overlay options:
42-key large numeric and function 56-key full alphanumeric You enter all of the characters and functions printed above the keys just like you would on a standard keypad. Note: You must use the color-coded keys to access several hidden characters (such as { and }) on the CK32 I-Safe keypad. The CK32 I-Safe supports TE 2000 VT100/220/320/340 and ANSI, TE 2000 5250, and TE 2000 3270. Use the TE 2000 keypad overlays to enter the same keys that you can enter on a VT/ANSI keyboard, and IBM 5250 keyboard, or an IBM 3270 keyboard. Like the standard CK32 I-Safe overlay, the TE 2000 keypad overlays let you enter all the characters printed on or above the keys. The terminal emulation keypads also come with the same color-coded keys that are on the standard overlay. For help using TE 2000 terminal emulation, see the TE 2000 Terminal Emulation Programmers Guide (P/N 977-055-xxx). 8 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Caps Shift A Ins
Esc NewLn 9 6 3 EOF Fld -
C F I
. Page Home 8 5 2 Help B Print E Fld
H Del J Reset 0 7 4 1 PA1 L PA2 M PA3 N F1 F2 F3 AutLg F4 Attn P Clear Q Dup R Clr D G K O F5 F6 F7 S FldExit T Hex U FMark V F8 SysRq F10 F9 W Roll X Roll F11 Y F12 Sp Z Ctl Alt Alpha Sp 3270/5250 42-Key Large Numeric and Function Keypad: This keypad is designed for applications that enter mainly numeric data (0-9) and that need dedicated function keys (F1- F12). This keypad also lets you enter the entire alphabet and special characters by pressing color-coded key sequences. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 9 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Roll Roll FldExit
F5 PA1 _ F1 F6 PA2
7 Print 4 F2
Fld
Home Home
NewLn Ins 8 Help
9 6 F7 PA3 F3 F8 AutLg
EOF F4 5 2 0 Clear E
Esc B Erase Dup F9 3
. F 1 Shift Ctl Alt A Caps Attn Clr C D Sp Del
) Reset Fld
F15 F20 H M R
F10 FldExit F11 F12 Hex F13 F14 I J K F16 F17 FMark F18 F19 O T N F21 F22 S
Pg X Pg W F23 P SReq U Pg Y 3270/5250 G L Q F24 V Pg Z 56-Key Full Alphanumeric Keypad: This keypad is designed for applications that enter mainly numeric data (0-9) and that may need to enter the entire alphabet. The keypad also provides function keys (F1-F24) and special characters, symbols, and functions by pressing color-coded key sequences. Using the Color-Coded Keys The keypad of the CK32 I-Safe provides color-coded keys to let you access additional characters, symbols, and functions printed on the keypad overlay. Once you understand how to use the color-coded keys and key sequences, you will know how to access all of the additional features printed on the keypad overlay. There are two color-coded modifier keys on the CK32 I-Safe: the orange B key and the green C key. 10 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer You press and release the first key and then press and release the second key to access the color-coded character or function printed above a key. Capitalizing All Characters To type all alphabetic characters as uppercase letters, you can enable the Caps Lock feature on the CK32 I-Safe keypad. To enable Caps Lock 1 Press the orange B key. The B icon appears on the status bar. 2 To enable Caps Lock and make the Caps Lock icon (
appear on the status bar, press a second key:
On the 42-key keypad, press Shift. On the 56-key keypad, press A.
) 3 Type an alphanumeric character. The letter appears as an uppercase character on the screen. To disable Caps Lock Press the orange B key and then press either Shift or A
(depending on your keypad). The Caps Lock icon disappears from the status bar. Using the Power Button When you press the Power button to turn off the CK32 I-Safe, you actually put the computer in Suspend mode. In Suspend mode, the CK32 I-Safe continues to supply power to all memory, but turns off power to most hardware. Network connectivity for 802.11 is not maintained in Suspend mode but are restored upon resume. This power-saving feature is designed to prolong battery life. When you press the Power button to turn the CK32 I-Safe back on, your computer resumes where it was when you turned it off. If you are using WPA or 802.1x security, the computer may need to reauthenticate before it starts your application. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 11 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer If the Battery light flashes and your CK32 I-Safe does not resume after pressing the Power button, your battery may be too low to supply power. Replace the battery. If replacing the battery does not solve the problem, see Resetting Your Computer on page 110. You can also use the Power button to reset the CK32 I-Safe. See Resetting Your Computer: on page 110 for more information. Note: Microsoft Windows Mobile supports other power saving modes including Screen Off, Unattend, and Suspend. Refer to Windows Mobile documentation for additional information. Understanding the Status Lights The status lights on the CK32 I-Safe turn on to indicate the status of the keyboard, battery, or a successful decode of a bar code. Ready to-Work indicator (blue) Good read light (green) Battery light (red) Keyboard status lights CK32 I-Safe Status Lights 12 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Understanding the CK32 I-Safe Status Lights Light Name Keyboard Status lights Battery Good Read Ready-to-Work indicator Description The left keyboard status light indicates the Shift Lock (orange) key is selected. The right keyboard status light indicates the Alpha Lock (green) key is selected. Light Status Off Blinking Red What It Means The battery is charged. The battery blinks when the charge is low. Continued use causes the CK32 I-Safe to enter Suspend mode. You may also experience a blinking low battery light when the battery is low and you attempt to take the CK32 I-Safe out of Suspend mode. This is normal and indicates the battery needs to be charged before you use the computer. This green light indicates when the CK32 I-Safe successfully decodes a bar code. This blue light indicates when the CK32 I-Safe is ready to use in your application, typically TE 2000. If you have problems using TE 2000, see the TE 2000 Terminal Emulation Programmers Guide (P/N 977-055-xxx). Light Status Off What It Means The TE 2000 application has not loaded successfully, or you are not running a Ready-
to-Work application. The CK32 I-Safe is not connected to the host. A connection to the server has been established and all network connections are active. Blinking On CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 13 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Using the Touch Screen The CK32 I-Safe has a color touch screen display. The screen is 240 x 320 pixels. The desktop is 240 x 300 pixels and the taskbar is 240 x 20 pixels. In addition, the screen supports Unicode characters, user-programmable fonts, and bitmap graphics. CK32 I-Safe Start Screen The Start screen has two distinct areas: the desktop and the taskbar. The desktop displays shortcuts to some of the applications installed on the CK32 I-Safe. The taskbar displays the Start menu icon, the time, the keyboard icon, and the desktop icon. 14 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Using the Stylus Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Your CK32 I-Safe has a stylus for selecting items and entering information on the touch screen. Use the stylus in place of a mouse. Using the Stylus Action Touch Double-tap Drag Description Touch the screen once with the stylus to select options, launch applications, close applications, or launch menus from the taskbar. Double-tap the screen with the stylus to launch applications. Hold the stylus on the screen and drag across the screen to select text and images. Tap and hold Tap and hold the stylus on an item to see a list of actions available for that item. Tap the action you want to perform. Aligning the Screen If the screen does not respond correctly when you tap it with the stylus, you may need to align the screen. To align the screen 1 Tap the Start icon. The Start menu appears. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 15 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer 2 Tap Settings > System. 3 Tap the Screen icon to open the Screen applet and then tap the Align Screen button. About the Audio System Interactive VoIP The CK32 I-Safe provides audio paths to support the following third-party applications:
Walkie-Talkie Digital recording AV playback Understanding the Audio Feedback The CK32 I-Safe provide you with audio feedback when it performs some functions. For example, you may hear a beep each time you scan a valid bar code. You can change the beeper volume for your needs and environment. To enable and adjust the beeper volume 1 Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > the Sounds &
Notifications tab > Sounds tab. 2 Tap the sounds that you want to enable, then tap ok to close the Sounds tab. 16 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer 3 Tap the Volume icon at the top of the screen, tap On, and then move the slider bar to the desired volume level. To disable the beeper volume To disable the beeper, tap the Volume icon, then drag the slider to the bottom of the scale, or tap Off. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 17 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer You can also change the beeper volume using the Intermec Setting application or by using the Beeper Volume command as described below. Additional Ways of Changing the Beeper Volume Method Use the Intermec Settings application. Use the Beeper Volume command. Procedure Go to Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings > Device Settings > Beeper > Volume. Remember to press Save when using Intermec Settings. For help, see Beeper Volume in the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual. Scanning Bar Codes Do not look directly into the window area or at a reflection of the beam while the CK32 I-Safe is scanning. Long-term exposure to the beam can damage your vision. Use the scanner to scan and enter bar code data. The CK32 I-Safe supports the scanning of 1D linear bar codes. When you unpack the CK32 I-Safe, these bar code symbologies are enabled:
Code 39 Code 128 PDF417 UPC-A UPC-E EAN-8 EAN-13 If you are using bar code labels that are encoded in a different symbology, you need to enable the symbology on the CK32 I-Safe. Use Intermec Settings to enable and disable symbologies for your scanner. 18 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Enabling or Disabling Symbologies Use the following procedure to enable or disable symbologies on your CK32 I-Safe. To enable or disable symbologies 1 Tap Start. The Start menu appears. 2 Tap Settings > System. 3 Tap the Intermec Settings icon. The Intermec Settings application appears. 4 From the Intermec Settings application, go to Data Collection > Internal Scanner > Symbologies. 5 Enable or disable any of the supported symbologies. 6 Tap File > Save Setting to save your settings. 7 Tap File > Exit to close Intermec Settings. 8 Scan bar code labels. Scanning a Bar Code Label to Verify Scanner Operation Use the following procedure to practice how to scan a bar code and to verify that your scanner is working correctly. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 19 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer To scan most bar code labels and verify scanner operation 1 Press the Power button to turn on the CK32 I-Safe. 2 Tap Start on the navigation bar located at the top of the screen. 3 Tap Word Mobile > New to open the Word Mobile application and a blank document. 4 Point the scanner window at the bar code label and hold the computer at a slight angle 15 to 25 cm (6 to 10 in) from the label. 5 Press the Scan button on the keypad, or pull the trigger on a handle, and direct the red beam so that it falls across all bars in the bar code label. The information you scanned appears in the Word Mobile document.
*INTERMEC*
*INTERMEC*
Code 39 Test Bar Code
*123456*
*123456*
When the CK32 I-Safe successfully reads a bar code label, you hear a high beep and the green Good Read light turns on briefly. 20 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer 6 Release the Scan button. To scan a PDF417 or Micro PDF417 bar code and verify scanner operation 1 Press the Power button to turn on the CK32 I-Safe. 2 Point the scanner window PDF417 or Micro PDF417 bar code label and hold the computer at a slight angle 15 to 25 cm (6 to 10 in) from the label. 3 Press the Scan button on the keypad or pull the trigger on a handle, and direct the red beam so that it falls across at the top row of the bar code label. Scanning a PDF417 or Micro PDF417 Bar Code Label Use this test bar code:
PDF417 Test Bar Code
*123456789abcdefg*
4 Move the beam down all rows of the bar code label. The CK32 clicks as it reads each row. 5 The CK32 I-Safe emits a high beep and the green Good Read light turns on briefly when the CK32 I-Safe successfully reads the entire bar code label. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 21 Chapter 1 Using the CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer You may need to continue moving the beam from the bottom of the bar code label to the top, and back to the bottom, until you hear the high beep. 6 Release the Scan button. 22 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 2 Understanding Windows Mobile This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0 for Pocket PC. In this chapter you will find these sections:
Understanding Windows Mobile Using Microsoft ActiveSync Using Internet Explorer Mobile CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 23 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Understanding Windows Mobile This chapter introduces Microsoft Windows Mobile 5.0. While using your CK32 I-Safe, keep these key points in mind:
Tap Start on the navigation bar, located at the top of the screen, to quickly move to programs, files, and settings. Use the command bar at the bottom of the screen to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menus, icons, and the onscreen keyboard. Tap and hold an item to see a pop-up menu containing a list of actions you can perform. Pop-up menus give you quick and easy access to the most common actions. Tap Start > Help, then select a topic on your CK32 I-Safe to find additional information on Windows Mobile components. Microsoft Windows Mobile contains these standard companion programs:
Word Mobile Excel Mobile PowerPoint Mobile Finding Information in Windows Mobile This chapter describes your CK32 I-Safe hardware, provides an overview of the programs on your CK32 I-Safe, and explains how to connect your CK32 I-Safe to a desktop, a network, or the Internet. Use the following table to understand more about the CK32 I-Safe. Finding Information in Windows Mobile For Information on:
Programs on the CK32 I-Safe. Additional programs you can install on the CK32 I-Safe. See this Source:
This chapter and the CK32 I-Safe Help. To view Help, tap Start > Help and then select a topic. The Windows Mobile CD. 24 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Finding Information in Windows Mobile (continued) For Information on:
Connecting to and synchronizing with a PC. Last minute updates and detailed technical information. Up-to-date information on Windows Mobile. See this Source:
The ActiveSync Help on your desktop. To view Help, click Help > Microsoft ActiveSync Help. The readme files located in the Microsoft ActiveSync folder on the desktop and on the Windows Mobile CD. www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/
Windows Mobile and many of the technologies supported by the CK32 I-Safe are not from Intermec Technologies. Many of the utilities and features on a Windows Mobile device come directly from Microsoft without any modification from Intermec Technologies. There may be certain Microsoft-specific issues that Intermec Technologies would not be able to support, so contact our front-line support personnel to determine the best source of assistance. Use these URLs for additional information about Microsoft Windows Mobile (Pocket PC):
msdn.microsoft.com/support/
news.microsoft.com support.microsoft.com/
Learning the Basic Skills Learning to use the CK32 I-Safe is easy. This section describes the basic concepts of using and customizing your CK32 I-Safe Computer. Using the Today Screen When you turn on your CK32 I-Safe for the first time each day, you see the Today screen. You can also display it by tapping the Start icon at the top left of your display and then Today. On the Today screen, you can see important information for the day. To customize what displays on the Today screen Tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab > Today. Status icons display information such as when the CK32 I-Safe is connected to the network or to the Internet. You can tap an icon to open the associated setting or program. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 25 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Accessing Programs You can switch from one program to another by selecting it from the Start menu. To access programs Tap Start > Programs and then the program name. The following is a partial list of programs that are on your CK32 I-Safe, in the order they appear in the Start menu. Look on the Windows Mobile CD for additional programs that you can install onto your CK32 I-Safe. Calendar Contacts Messaging Windows Media Closing an Application Tapping the OK at the upper right of the application display does not mean that the application is closed. To make sure that an application is properly closed you need to verify that the memory used by the application is released. To release memory Tap Start > Settings > System > Memory > Running Internet Explorer Programs. Select the application you want to close and tap Stop. Using the Navigation Bar and the Command Bar The navigation bar is located at the top of the screen. It displays the active program and current time, and allows you to switch to programs and close screens. Windows Mobile Navigation Bar The command bar is located at the bottom of the screen. Use the command bar to perform tasks in programs. The command bar includes menu names, functions, and the Input Panel icon when needed. 26 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Windows Mobile Command Bar Using Pop-Up Menus Use pop-up menus to quickly perform an action on an item. For example, you can use a pop-up menu to delete or make a copy of an item. To access a pop-up menu, tap and hold the item on which you want to perform the action. When the menu appears, tap the action you want to perform, or tap anywhere outside the menu to close the menu without performing the action. Entering Information You can enter information on your CK32 I-Safe in several ways depending on the program you are using:
Understanding the Ways to Enter Information Enter Information By: Description Synchronizing Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize or copy information between your desktop PC and the CK32 I-Safe. For more information on ActiveSync, see ActiveSync Help on your desktop PC. Intermec recommends using ActiveSync version 4.1 or later with Windows Mobile devices. You can download the latest version of ActiveSync on the Microsoft web site. Enter typed text into the CK32 I-Safe by tapping keys on the onscreen keyboard or by using the handwriting recognition software. Use the stylus to write directly on the screen. Use the stylus to draw directly on the screen. Create a stand-alone recording or embed a recording into a document or note. Typing Writing Drawing Recording Use the input panel to enter information in any program on your CK32 I-Safe Computer. You can either type using the onscreen keyboard or write using Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber. In either case, the characters appear as typed text on the screen. To show or hide the input panel 1 Tap the Input Panel icon. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 27 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile 2 Tap the arrow next to the Input Panel icon to see your choices. When you use the input panel, your CK32 I-Safe Computer anticipates the word you are typing or writing and displays it above the input panel. When you tap the displayed word, it is inserted into your text at the insertion point. The more you use the CK32 I-Safe, the more it learns to anticipate. To change word suggestion options, such as the number of words suggested at one time, tap Start > Settings > the Personal tab >
Input > the Word Completion tab. Typing With the Onscreen Keyboard Tap the input panel arrow, then tap Keyboard. On the soft keyboard that is displayed, tap the keys with your stylus. To type lowercase letters, tap the keys with the stylus. To type a single uppercase letter or symbol, tap the Shift key. To tap multiple uppercase letters or symbols, tap the CAP key. To convert a letter to uppercase, tap and hold the stylus on the letter and drag up. To add a space, drag the stylus to the right across at least two keys. To backspace one character, drag the stylus to the left across at least two keys. To insert a carriage return, tap and hold the stylus anywhere on the keyboard and drag down. 28 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile To use larger keys 1 Tap the input panel arrow. 2 Select Options. 3 Select the Large keys radio button. Using Block Recognizer Character recognition software gives you a fast and easy method for entering information in any program on the CK32 I-Safe. Letters, numbers, and punctuation you write are translated into typed text. To use Block Recognizer 1 Tap the input panel arrow and then tap Block Recognizer. 2 Write a letter in the box. It converts to typed text that appears on the screen. For help using Block Recognizer, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Using Letter Recognizer With Letter Recognizer, you can write letters using the stylus just as you would on paper. To use Letter Recognizer 1 Tap the input panel arrow and then tap Letter Recognizer. 2 Write a letter in the box. It converts to typed text that appears on the screen. For help using Letter Recognizer, tap the question mark next to the writing area. Using Transcriber With Transcriber, you can write anywhere on the screen using the stylus block just as you would on paper. Unlike Letter Recognizer and Clock Recognizer, you can write an entire sentence of information. To use Transcriber 1 Tap the input panel arrow and then tap Transcriber. 2 Tap ok. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 29 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile 3 Write anywhere on the screen. Pause and let Transcriber change the written characters to typed characters. For help using Transcriber, tap the question mark in the lower right-hand corner of the screen. Selecting Typed Text If you want to edit or format typed text, you must select it first. Drag the stylus across the text you want to select. You can cut, copy, and paste text by tapping and holding the selected words and then tapping an editing command on the pop-up menu or by tapping the command under Menu. Writing on the Screen In any program that accepts writing, such as the Notes program, you can use your stylus to write directly on the screen. Write the way you do on paper. You can edit and format what you have written and convert the information to text in the future. To convert the writing to text Select Menu > Tools > Recognize. Your writing is converted to text. Finding and Organizing Information You can use File Explorer to find files on your CK32 I-Safe and organize these files into folders. To open File Explorer Select Start > Programs > File Explorer. Customizing the CK32 I-Safe You can customize the CK32 I-Safe by adjusting settings and installing additional software. Adjusting Settings You can adjust CK32 I-Safe settings for your environment. To view the Settings options Select Start > Settings > either the Personal tab, the System tab, or the Connections tab. 30 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Example of the Personal Tab Adjustable Settings on the CK32 I-Safe Setting Buttons Input Lock Menus Owner Information Sounds &
Notifications Today Why Adjust It?
To associate a program with a button or customize the way your Up/Down control repeats. To select and customize the input method you want to use (Keyboard, Block Recognizer, Letter Recognizer, or Transcriber). To limit access to the CK32 I-Safe. To customize what appears on the Start menu. Only 7 programs can appear on the Start menu. To enter your contact information. To Enable or Disable sounds for events, programs, or notifications. To select items to appear on the Today screen. You can also change the appearance of your desktop. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 31 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Adding or Removing Programs Programs added to your CK32 I-Safe at the factory are stored in Read Only Memory (ROM). You cannot remove this software. All other programs and files added to the CK32 I-Safe after factory installation are stored in Random Access Memory
(RAM). You can install any program created for the CK32 I-Safe, as long as the computer has enough memory available. Go to the Windows Mobile web site (www.microsoft.com/windowsmobile/
resources/communities/default.mspx) to find software. Using Microsoft ActiveSync Use Microsoft ActiveSync to synchronize the information on your desktop with the information on the CK32 I-Safe. Synchronization compares the data on the CK32 I-Safe with your PC and updates both computers with the most recent information. Note: By default, ActiveSync does not automatically synchronize all types of information. Use ActiveSync options to turn synchronization on or off for specific information types. You can also perform these functions with ActiveSync:
Copy files between the CK32 I-Safe and the desktop. Back up and restore the CK32 I-Safe data. Control when synchronization occurs by selecting a synchronization mode. Select which information types are synchronized and control how much data is synchronized. Note: Intermec recommends using ActiveSync version 4.1 or later with Windows Mobile devices. You can download the latest version of ActiveSync on the Microsoft web site. To install ActiveSync 1 Connect the CK32 I-Safe to your desktop PC using the AN1 Communications Adapter (P/N 872-223-xxx). 2 Install ActiveSync on your desktop. ActiveSync is available from the Windows Mobile CD or from the Microsoft web site. ActiveSync is already installed on the CK32 I-Safe. 32 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile After installation, ActiveSync automatically launches the ActiveSync Setup Wizard. 3 Follow the screens of the ActiveSync to complete the synchronization process. The wizard helps you connect to the CK32 I-Safe, set up a partnership for synchronization, and customizes synchronization settings. The synchronization process automatically begins when you finish the wizard. 4 Disconnect the CK32 I-Safe from your desktop PC. Once you have set up ActiveSync and completed the first synchronization process, you can initiate synchronization from your CK32 I-Safe. To start ActiveSync on your CK32 I-Safe Tap Start > Programs > ActiveSync. ActiveSync opens and shows you the synchronization status. For more information about ActiveSync on the CK32 I-Safe, switch to ActiveSync, tap Start > Help, and then select a topic. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 33 Chapter 2 Understanding Windows Mobile Using Internet Explorer Mobile You can use Internet Explorer Mobile to run web-based applications, and view pages downloaded to the CK32 I-Safe. You can also connect to the internet through an ISP or a network connection. You can make connections using a modem, a wireless network, or Ethernet. You can use a modem connection to set up connections with an external modem. To use Internet Explorer 1 Set up a connection to your ISP or corporate network by going to Start > Settings > Connections > and tap the Connections icon. Use the Connections Help to understand the process you need to go through to set up a connection. 2 Tap Start > Internet Explorer. The default page that appears when you open Internet Explorer contains links to Intermec-
specific information and to the Windows Mobile web site. Default Internet Explorer Web Page 34 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Use this chapter to understand how to configure the CK32 I-Safe to communicate in your network. In this chapter, you will find these sections:
Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Operating Parameters Setting Up Ethernet Communications Setting Up Bluetooth Communications Setting Up 802.11 Radio Communications Configuring Security on the CK32 I-Safe CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 35 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Configuring the Operating Parameters You can configure many operating parameters on the CK32 I-Safe, such as the symbologies it decodes or the network settings it uses. The CK32 I-Safe provides a configuration application called Intermec Settings that allows you to set all of the operating parameters in one place. Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using Intermec Settings Use Intermec Settings to configure the CK32 I-Safe and to view system information. Note: Using Intermec Settings, there is no way of detecting preferred networks. You access Intermec Settings from the Settings menu. To start Intermec Settings 1 Tap the Start icon to open the Start menu. 2 From the Start menu, select Settings. 3 From the Settings window, select the System tab. 4 Tap the Intermec Settings icon (
). The Intermec Settings application appears. 36 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe For detailed information on the commands available in Intermec Settings, see the Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual
(P/N 073529). The Intermec Computer Command Reference Manual is available from the Intermec web site. Navigating in Intermec Settings To Do This Function Select or expand a command Select text in a text box Save settings Do This Tap the command Tap in the text box and drag the stylus over the text Tap File > Save Settings or tap the disk icon. Remotely Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using SmartSystems Foundation The SmartSystems server lets you manage all your SmartSystems-enabled devices at the same time from a central host PC. The CK32 I-Safe ships with the SmartSystems client, which means it is SmartSystems enabled. The SmartSystems server has a console that displays all of the CK32 I-Safes in your network. In the console, you can right-click a CK32 I-Safe and a menu appears. To configure the CK32 I-Safe, choose Intermec Settings from the menu. The SmartSystems server and console are part of SmartSystems Foundation and are available from the Intermec web site. To download SmartSystems Foundation, go to www.intermec.com/
SmartSystems. For information on how to use the SmartSystems server, see the online manual. Setting Up Ethernet Communications You can use the CK32 I-Safe directly in an Ethernet network by connecting to the network using the AN1 Communications Adapter. Note: The CK32 I-Safe supports Ethernet communication or 802.11 communications but it cannot support both at the same time. The factory default is no communications are enabled. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 37 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Intrinsically Safe rules prohibit direct connection to the CK32 I-Safe. To use the CK32 I-Safe in an Ethernet network 1 Tap the iConnect icon (
) in the lower right corner of the Today screen.From the menu, select Enable > Ethernet. This change disables 802.11 networking on the CK32 I-Safe. 2 You will be prompted to reboot the device for changes to take affect. Press and hold the Power button for 10 seconds to initiate the reboot. Do not use the Reset button . See Preferred Reset Method on page 110 for more information. 3 Go to Start > Settings > the System tab > Intermec Settings
> Communications > Ethernet Adapter > IP Settings. 4 If you have a DHCP server, enable DHCP. or If you do not have a DHCP server, set these parameters:
Subnet mask Default router IP address 38 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 5 If required for your network, you may also need to set these parameters on each CK32 I-Safe:
Primary and secondary DNS servers Primary and secondary WINS servers 6 Make sure your CK32 I-Safe is talking to the network and that the network can see your CK32 I-Safe. To check the status of your Ethernet connection 1 Tap the iConnect icon (
) in the lower right corner of the Today screen. 2 From the menu, select Status > Ethernet. The Ethernet Status screen appears and checks the connection. You can also use iConnect to configure the network settings if you need to change any setting. Tap Tools > Ethernet IP Settings from the iConnect menu. Setting Up Bluetooth Communications You can send information to a Bluetooth device wirelessly using the standard Bluetooth radio in the CK32 I-Safe. The Bluetooth technology uses short-range radio links and allows for communications over a 10-meter (32.8 foot) range. You can use the Bluetooth radio to connect to wireless devices including:
Scanners Printers Headsets CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 39 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe To turn the Bluetooth radio on 1 Select Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings >
Bluetooth. 2 Tap the Power On radio button and tap File > Save Settings. Once Bluetooth is enabled, it stays enabled through a warm or cold boot and maintains virtual COM ports (such as printing) registration. For more information on Bluetooth software, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit and the Wireless Printing Development Guide in the Intermec Developer Library (IDL). You can download this Resource Kit from the Intermec Developer Library web site at www.intermec.com/idl. 40 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Use this table to understand the settings you see in the Bluetooth menu in Intermec Settings. Bluetooth Settings Setting Power Class of Device Discoverable Connectable IBT Radio Device Address Description Set and view whether the Bluetooth radio is on or off. Determines how the device appears to other devices during discovery. Makes the CK32 I-Safe discoverable. Makes the CK32 I-Safe connectable. Displays the version of the Intermec Bluetooth Library. Displays the version of the Bluetooth Radio Hardware. Displays the Bluetooth address of your CK32 I-
Safe. Configuring Bluetooth Communications for Wireless Printing This section explains how to configure the CK32 I-Safe for Bluetooth wireless printing. You need to:
make sure Bluetooth power is on. For help, see the procedure in Setting Up Bluetooth Communications on page 39. create an application that lets you print. For help, see the next section. select the current wireless printer on the CK32 I-Safe. For help, see Selecting the Current Wireless Printer on the CK32 I-Safe on page 42. Creating an Application That Lets You Print Wirelessly The CK32 I-Safe does not ship with an application that lets you print wirelessly. You must create an application that opens the wireless printing COM port on the CK32 I-Safe. For help, see the Bluetooth Resource Kit section of the IDL Resource Kit Developers Guide, P/N 934-006-xxx. The Wireless Printing applet is available from Start > Settings >
System. The applet separates the task of wireless printing setup from other Bluetooth management tasks. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 41 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe The Wireless Printing applet uses the concept of a current wireless printer. The CK32 I-Safe connects to the current wireless printer when your application opens the wireless printing COM port on the CK32 I-Safe. If there is no current wireless printer selected on your CK32 I-Safe, there is no wireless printing COM port registered on your CK32 I-Safe. You must select a current wireless printer on your CK32 I-Safe, as described in the next section. The Wireless Printing applet performs these tasks on the CK32 I-
Safe:
Helps you select the current wireless printer Stores the current wireless printer in the registry Registers/deregisters the wireless printing COM port Stores the wireless printing COM port in the registry as the WPort Specifically, the current wireless printer is registered and deregistered on Bluetooth stack load/unload. If you select a different current wireless printer, the existing wireless printing COM port is deregistered and the new one is registered instead. The Wireless Printing applet uses the Bluetooth COM Port Control to handle COM port registration/deregistration. Selecting the Current Wireless Printer on the CK32 I-Safe By default, there is no current wireless printer selected on the CK32 I-Safe. There are three ways to select the current wireless printer:
Discovering the printer using Bluetooth device discovery Manually entering the printers Bluetooth device address Choosing the printer from a list of previously discovered printers 42 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe To discover the printer with Bluetooth device discovery 1 Select Start > Settings > the Systems tab > Wireless Printing. The Wireless Printing wizard appears. 2 Tap Acquire Printer to initiate printer discovery. All Bluetooth printers discovered within range appear in the devices list. 3 Select the printer you want to connect to and then tap OK. If your preferred printer does not appear, make sure the printer is turned on and discovery is enabled, and then repeat Steps 1 through 3. 4 Tap Test Print. The printer prints out the test page. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 43 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe To manually enter the device address of the printer 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > Wireless Printing. The Wireless Printing wizard appears. 2 Tap Manual > Acquire Printer. The wizard advances to the next screen where you enter the device address. 3 Type the address of the printer in the Enter Device Address text box and then tap OK. The keyword -unknown- appears in the Device Name field in the Current Wireless Printer box. The name of the printer is not sent to the CK32 I-Safe when you manually enter the printer address. 4 Tap Test Print. The printer prints out the test page. To choose the printer from a list of previously discovered printers 1 Make sure you have already performed a Bluetooth device discovery. 2 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > Wireless Printing. The Wireless Printing wizard appears. 3 Tap Set Different Printer. The Devices list appears with the list of previously discovered printers. 4 Select the printer you want and tap OK. 5 Tap Test Print. The printer prints out the test page. 44 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Connecting to a Bluetooth Audio Device Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Use the Bluetooth Audio applet to discover, activate, and connect to Bluetooth audio devices such as a Bluetooth headset. You can control the audio volume and microphone gain for the connected Bluetooth audio device. To connect to a Bluetooth headset 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > Bluetooth Audio. 2 Tap Search for devices. Discovered audio devices are added to the list with an icon to identify them. 3 Double-tap a Bluetooth audio device from the list of Connect headsets / hands-free devices. 4 When a pop-up menu appears and then select Activate. The device icon changes to include a check mark. 5 Double-tap the device name and then select Connect. When a connection is established, the statues changes to connected. 6 Tap the Volume slider bar or Microphone slider bar to adjust the setting. Setting Up 802.11 Radio Communications The CK32 I-Safe has an internal 802.11 b/g radio to transfer data using wireless communications. This section of the manual assumes that you have already set up your wireless communications network including your access points. If you are using a UDP Plus network, you also need to have your Intermec Application Server communicating with a host computer. Note: The CK32 I-Safe supports Ethernet communication or 802.11 communications but it cannot support both at the same time. The factory default is no communications are enabled. The CK32 I-Safe supports these network protocols:
TCP/IP UDP Plus The next sections explain the parameters you need to configure for the CK32 I-Safe to work in your wireless network. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 45 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Configuring the Network Parameters for a TCP/IP Network In a TCP/IP network, the CK32 I-Safe communicates with a host computer directly using TCP/IP. The access point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the wired network and the wireless network. To use wireless communications in a TCP/IP network 1 Tap the iConnect icon (
) in the lower right corner of the Today screen.From the menu, select Enable > Wireless. This disables the Ethernet connection. 2 You will be prompted to reboot the device for changes to take affect. Press and hold the Power button for 10 seconds to initiate the reboot. Do not use the Reset button. See Preferred Reset method on page 110 for more information. 3 Go to Start > Settings > the System tab > Intermec Settings
> Communications > 802.11 Radio. 4 Configure these network parameters on each CK32 I-Safe in the network:
Network name (SSID) IP settings (if not using DHCP) 5 Make sure that the CK32 I-Safe is talking to the network and that the network can see the CK32 I-Safe. 46 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 6 Configure security. For help, see See Using ISpyWiFi on page 48. You can configure the network parameters on the CK32 I-Safe to using Intermec Settings or ISpyWiFi. For information on Intermec Settings, see Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using Intermec Settings on page 36. Configuring the Network Parameters for a UDP Plus Network In a UDP Plus network, the CK32 I-Safe communicates with a host computer through the Intermec Application Server. The Intermec Application Server translates UDP Plus packets on the wireless network into TCP/IP packets on the wired network and vice versa. The access point acts as a bridge to allow communications between the wired network and the wireless network. To use wireless communications in a UDP Plus network 1 Go to Start > Settings > the System tab > Intermec Settings
> Communications >UDP Plus. 2 Configure these network parameters on the CK32 I-Safe:
UDP Plus Activate Controller IP address Controller Port 3 Make sure the CK32 I-Safe is talking to the network and that the network can see the CK32 I-Safe. 4 Configure security. For help, see Configuring Security on the CK32 I-Safe in the next section. Checking the Status of Your Wireless Connection After you configure your wireless settings, you can use iConnect to check the status of your connection. To check the status of your wireless connection 1 Tap the iConnect icon (
) in the lower right corner of the Today screen. 2 From the menu, select Status > Wireless. The Wireless Status screen appears and checks the connection. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 47 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Using ISpyWiFi You can also use iConnect to configure the network settings if you need to change anything by tapping Tools > Wireless Settings from the iConnect menu. The ISpyWiFi utility provides more detailed information for the 802.11 radio connection in your CK32 I-Safe, such as MAC address, access point information, association, encryption, power management, antenna status, RSSI, data link rates, and supplicant status. Starting the Utility The ISpyWiFi utility is installed in your CK32 I-Safe as an executable. You can either start the utility using File Explorer, or creating a shortcut to start the utility from the CK32 I-Safe desktop, or from iConnect. To start the ISpy WiFi utility via File Explorer Tap Start > Programs > the File Explorer icon, then tap the
\Windows folder from the root. Scroll down for, then double-click the ISpyWifi executable. To place the ISpyWiFi utility in the Programs group 1 Press and hold your stylus on the ISpyWifi executable for its pop-up menu, then select Copy. 48 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 2 Scroll up to the \Start Menu\Programs folder, then tap it to open. 3 Press and hold your stylus in an empty (white) area in the folder, for its pop-up menu, then select Paste Shortcut. Close the File Explorer, select Start > Programs to locate the Shortcut to ISpyWifi icon, like the following. Tap this icon to access the ISpyWifi application. To start iSpyWiFi from iConnect 1 Tap the iConnect icon (
) in the lower right corner of the Today screen. 2 From the menu, select Status > Wireless > Advanced. The iSpyWiFi screen appears. ISpyWiFi The ISpyWiFi tab contains network interface, configuration, access point, and radio frequency information:
CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 49 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe ISpyWiFi Tab Contents WiFi NIC (Network Interface Card) BCMCF1 MAC IP(DHCP) IP (Static) AP Status Channel ESSID BSSID Config A WLAN adapter and its associated driver version The client radio MAC address The IP address of the client radio, if using DHCP The IP address of the client radio, if using a static IP address Shows whether the radio is associated with the access point The channel on which the radio is communicating with the access point The text SSID (Network Name) for your network MAC address of radio AP with which the client radio is communicating Association Shows one of the following types:
Open, WPA, WPA-PSK, WPA2, Network EAP Encrypt Power Antenna RF Shows potential encryptions for the association shown:
Key Absent/WEP, TKIP, Key Absent, TKIP/AES, WEP CAM (Constantly Awake Mode) or FAST PSP (Power Save Poll) Diversity (multiple antennas), Primary (one antenna) TX Power Transmit power level in milliwatts (mW). RSSI Link The Received Signal Strength Indicator. The closer to zero, the better. For example: -40dBm is excellent, while -60dBm is good. The data rate at which the radios are communicating 50 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe WiFi Scan Use the WiFi Scan tab to scan your network and bring back information about any access points with which you can communicate. Tap Scan, then wait for the table to fill with information. Tap any of the columns to sort by ascending or descending order. Tap the slider bar on the bottom to scroll left and right to view all of the information. WiFi Scan Tab Contents Scan SSID Signal Channel BSSID Privacy The SSID broadcast from the access point The RSSI seen from the access point Channel on which client radio is communicating with access point The MAC address for the access point radio Y - WEP, TKIP, or AES encryption is being used;
N - no encryption is being used CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 51 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Supplicant The Supplicant tab provides you with security and authentication information configured elsewhere in the CK32 I-Safe. SuppSupplicant Tab Contents Supplicant Tab Contents Supplicant Service Status Authentication State:
ON: Intermec Funk Security is enabled OFF: Microsoft Security is enabled Starting Up:
Shutting Down:
Unknown/Undefined:
authenticated: Authentication Server successful authentication failed: Previous authentication attempt failed disconnected: No authentication used, Open or Static WEP connection used acquired: Access point located, authentication process not initiated authenticating: Attempting authentication with Authentication Server logoff: Current session terminated by supplicant unknown: Error occurred, but not defined 52 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Supplicant Tab Contents (continued) Authentication Result success: Authentication successful time-out: Authentication Server not responding to requests, you may be out of range no credentials: Proper credentials not configured in device client reject: Unable to validate access point certificate server reject: Authentication Server rejects submitted credentials unknown: No authentication used or in the process of authentication Supplicant Events Displays output from the supplicant detailing its status. Intermec Supplicant Version Version of Intermec Funk Security in the CK32 I-Safe Click Configure Profile to launch the Profile Wizard and configure 802.11 options. Click Reconnect to disassociate the radio, momentarily dropping its connection. The radio then reassociates and reauthenticates, but does not do anything with the radio driver. Click Clear Events to remove the information shown in the Supplicant Event box. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 53 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Ping Use the Ping tab to contact with any host in your network for information. Ping Tab Contents Ping Timing Statistics BSSID Channel:
RSSI Link Min: The shortest ping reply in milliseconds (ms) Max: The maximum ping reply in milliseconds Avg: The average ping reply time Count: The number of pings already completed Timeouts: The number of pings that did not receive a response The MAC address for the access point radio The channel on which the access point is communicating The RSSI seen on the access point The speed at which the last ping occurred. 1 From the Host drop-down list, select an IP address for the host you want to ping. Enter a new IP address using the input panel or the keypad. Select Clear List to remove all the IP addresses from the drop-down list. 2 From the Repetitions drop-down list, select the number of times to ping the selected host. These repetitions are done once per second. 54 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 3 Tap Ping to initiate contact with the selected host 4 Depending on how the screen is set up, you can toggle between a graph and a list of ping results:
Tap Graph to toggle to the graphical view of 25 of the most recent pings and their response results, like in the following sample graph:
Note the size of the gray area represents the standard deviation from the mean. Tap List to toggle to detailed information showing what ping touched what host and its RTT (Round Trip Time). Supplicant Logging If you reach a situation where you need to send in debug information to Intermec Product Support or Intermec Engineering, you can use the Intermec Funk Security logging feature. 1 Tap the Supplicant tab, then tap Configure Profile to access the Profile Wizard. 2 Tap Edit Selected Profile, then tap the Advanced tab.Check Enable Logging, tap ok to close the profile settings, then tap ok to close the Profile Wizard. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 55 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe The debug output file is then stored in the \My Device root folder as a text file called uroddsvc. Using File Explorer, press and hold your stylus on this file for its pop-up menu, then select any of its options to copy, beam, send, or delete this file. Configuring Security on the CK32 I-Safe The CK32 I-Safe provides three types of security for your wireless network:
Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) 802.1x WEP This section explains how to configure security on your wireless CK32 I-Safe. If you choose not to use security, see Disabling Security on page 79. Intermec always recommends that you implement security. You must use either Funk or Microsoft security to implement your security solution. For details, see Choosing Between Funk and Microsoft Security on page 60. 56 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe If you are using WPA-802.1x, WPA2-802.1x, or 802.1x security, this section assumes that your authentication server and authenticators are properly configured. Note: Your security choice does not depend on your authentication server. For example, you can choose Funk security if you use Microsofts Internet Authentication Service. Understanding the Wireless Network Your wireless radio adapter (network interface card) connects to wireless networks of two types: infrastructure and ad-hoc networks. Infrastructure networks get you onto your corporate network and the internet. The CK32 I-Safe establishes a wireless connection to an access point, which links you to the rest of the network. When you connect to a network using an access point, you are using the 802.11 b/g infrastructure mode. Ad-hoc networks are private networks shared between two or more clients. Each wireless network is assigned a name or SSID (Service Set Identifier) to allow multiple networks to exist in the same area without infringing on each other. Intermec recommends using security with wireless networks to prevent unauthorized access to your network and to ensure the privacy of transmitted data. Authentication by both the network and the user are required elements for secure networks. Use the following table to understand some of the wireless network terminology. Using WPA Security Wi-Fi Protected Access (WPA) is a strongly enhanced, interoperable Wi-Fi security that addresses many of the vulnerabilities of Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP). Instead of WEP, WPA uses Temporal Key Integrity Protocol (TKIP) for its data encryption method. Currently, WPA satisfies some of the requirements in the IEEE 802.11i draft standard. When the standard is finalized, WPA will maintain forward compatibility. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 57 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe WPA runs in 802.1x (Enterprise) mode or PSK (Pre-Shared Key) mode:
In Enterprise mode, WPA provides user authentication using 802.1x and an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP). That is, an authentication server (such as a RADIUS server) must authenticate each device before the device can communicate with the wireless network. In PSK mode, WPA provides user authentication using a shared key between the authenticator and the CV30. WPA-
PSK is a good solution for small offices or home offices that do not want to use an authentication server. To use WPA security, you need:
an authentication server (Enterprise mode only). an access point with an 802.11 b/g radio that supports WPA. a CK32 I-Safe with the 802.11b/g radio and the 802.1x/WPA security option. The CK32 I-Safe also supports Wi-Fi Protected Access 2 (WPA2) if you are using Funk security. WPA2 uses an Advanced Encryption Standard (AES) for data encryption. WPA2 runs in 802.1x (Enterprise) mode or PSK (Pre-Shared Key) mode:
For WPA2-802.1x mode, WPA2 requires authentication in two phases; the first is an open system authentication and the second uses 802.1x and an Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP) authentication method. In PSK mode, WPA2 provides user authentication using a shared key between the authenticator and the CK32 I-Safe. WPA2-PSK is a good solution for small offices or home offices that do not want to use an authentication server. Using Static WEP Security The CK32 I-Safe uses the Wired Equivalent Privacy (WEP) protocol to add security to your wireless network based on the 802.11 standard. 58 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe To use WEP security, you need:
a CV30 with an 802.11b/g radio. an access point with an 802.11b/g radio. Using 802.1x Security 802.1x security provides centralized user authentication using an authentication server, authenticators (access points), and supplicants. These components communicate using an EAP authentication type, such as TLS (Transport Layer Security) or PEAP (Protected Extensible Authentication Protocol). 802.1x security provides data encryption using dynamic WEP key management. To use 802.1x security, you need:
an access point with an 802.11b/g radio. a CK32 I-Safe with an 802.11b/g radio and the 802.1x/WPA security option. an authentication server. Using LEAP Security Lightweight Extensible Authentication Protocol (LEAP), also known as Cisco-Wireless EAP, provides username/password-
based authentication between a wireless client and a RADIUS server. In the 802.1x framework, traffic cannot pass through an Ethernet hub or wireless network access point until it successfully authenticates itself. The station must identify itself and prove that it is an authorized user before it is actually allowed to use the LAN. LEAP also delivers a session key to the authenticated station, so that future frames can be encrypted with a key that is different than keys used by other sessions. To use LEAP security, you need:
a RADIUS server. Cisco access points. LEAP security is not supported with Microsoft security. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 59 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Choosing Between Funk and Microsoft Security The CK32 I-Safe provides both Funk and Microsoft security choices. Funk security is the default setting. Use the following sections to set security using either Funk or Microsoft as your security choice. Both security choices offer similar features, but Funk security also offers these features:
CCX v2.0 compliance Support for LEAP, TTLS, and FAST Configuration of up to four profiles If you want to use the default Funk security, you need to select a profile. For help, see one of the following sections, Configuring Funk Security Using Intermec Settings. or Configuring Funk Security Using the Profile Wizard. If you want to use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. For help, see Configuring Microsoft Security on page 73. Configuring Funk Security Using Intermec Settings You can define up to four profiles for Funk security. Different profiles let your CK32 I-Safe communicate in different networks without having to change all of your security settings. For example, you may want to set up one profile for the manufacturing floor and one for the warehouse. By default, the active profile is Profile_1. To select a profile for Funk security 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > Intermec Settings. 2 Select Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security. 3 Select Active Profile, choose a profile from the list, and save your settings. 4 Tap the active profile to expand it. 5 (Optional) Give your profile a meaningful name:
a Select Profile Label and a text box appears. b Select the text in the box, type a meaningful name, and save your settings. 60 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 6 Select one profile as the active profile by tapping Active Profile and choosing a profile fro the drop-down list. 7 Save your settings. Configuring WPA Security With Funk Security Use these procedures to set WPA-802.1x, WPA2-802.1x, WPA-
PSK, or WPA2-PSK security on your CK32 I-Safe with Funk security. To configure WPA-802.1x with Funk security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 2 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CK32 I-Safe. 3 Make sure you have selected Funk as your security choice. 4 Open Intermec Settings. 5 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security
> Profile. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2 and press Enter. Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP if you are using WPA. Encryption automatically defaults to WEP if you are using Shared. 7 For 8021x, choose TTLS, PEAP, EAP-FAST, or TLS and press Enter. If you choose TTLS or PEAP:
a For Prompt for Credentials, choose Enter credentials now. Note: You can use Prompt for credentials to troubleshoot your connection to the network if you have problems. By choosing Enter credentials now, you are storing the user name and password on the device so that you will not need to enter it every time. b Select User name and type your user name. c d For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. Select User Password and type a user password. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 61 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Note: You must have the date on the CK32 I-Safe set correctly when you enable Validate Server Certificate. If you choose TLS:
a Load a user and root certificate on your CK32 I-Safe. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 76. b For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. c You must enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server Common Name if you want to increase your level of security. 8 Save your settings. To enable WPA-PSK or WPA2-PSK with Funk security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 2 Make sure you have configured the communications parameters and selected Funk as your security choice. 3 Make sure you have selected Funk as your security choice. 4 Open Intermec Settings. 5 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security
> Profile. 6 For Association, choose WPA or WPA2. 7 For 8021x, choose None. 8 For Pre-Shared Key, enter the pre-shared key or the passphrase. The pre-shared key may be given in hexadecimal by prefixing a string of 64 hex digits with 0x for a total of 66 characters, or by entering a passphrase of 8 to 63 characters. The pre-shared key value must exactly match the key on the authenticator. 9 Save your settings. Configuring 802.1x Security With Funk Security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 62 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 2 Make sure you have configured the communications and radio parameters on your CK32 I-Safe. 3 Make sure you have selected Funk as your security choice. 4 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security
> Profile. 5 For Association, choose Open. 6 For Encryption, choose WEP. 7 For Inner Authentication, choose TTLS, PEAP or TLS. If you choose TTLS or PEAP:
a Select User name and type your user name. b Select Password prompt, and choose Enter password now. Note: You can use Prompt for password to troubleshoot your connection to the network if you have problems. Select User Password and type a user password. c d For Validate Server Certificate, choose Enabled. If you choose TLS:
a Load a user and root certificate on your CK32 I-Safe. For help, see Loading a Certificate on page 76. b For Validate Server Certificate, choose Yes. c You must enter a User Name and Subject Name. You can also enter a Server Common Name if you want to increase your level of security. 8 Save your settings. Configuring LEAP Security on the CK32 I-Safe 1 Open Intermec Settings. 1 Make sure you have selected Funk as your security choice. 2 Make sure you have configured the communications parameters and selected Funk as your security choice. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 63 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 3 From Intermec Settings, choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security > Profile. 4 For 8021x, choose LEAP. 5 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. Encryption automatically defaults to TKIP if you choose WPA, to AES if you choose WPA2, and to WEP if you choose Open or Network EAP. 6 For Prompt for Credentials, select Enter credentials now. 7 Select User name and type your user name. 8 Select User Password and type your user password. 9 Save your settings. Configuring Static WEP Security With Funk Security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 2 Make sure you have configured the communications parameters and selected Funk as your security choice. 3 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Funk Security
> Profile. 4 For Association, choose Open. 5 For Encryption, choose WEP. 6 For 8021x, choose None. 7 Define a value for the keys you want to use. You can define up to four keys (Key 1 through Key 4). Enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5-
byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 8 For Transmit key, choose the key you want to use for transmitting data. 9 Save your settings. 64 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Configuring Funk Security Using the Profile Wizard You can start 802.11 b/g communications on the CK32 I-Safe using the Profile Wizard. A profile contains all the information necessary to authenticate you to the network, such as login name, password or certificate, and protocols by which the CK32 I-Safe is authenticated. You can have up to four profiles for different networks. For example, you may have different login names or passwords on different networks. To select a profile for Funk security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 2 Select Start > Settings > the Systems tab > Wireless Network. or Tap the iConnect icon (
of the screen and select Tools > Wireless Settings. The Profile Wizard appears on the screen.
) icon in the lower right corner 3 From the Profile list, select the profile you want to configure 4 Tap Edit Selected Profile. 5 (Optional) Give your profile a meaningful name by selecting the text in the Profile Label text box and typing a meaningful name. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 65 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 6 From the Network type list, select either Infrastructure or Ad-Hoc. Select Infrastructure if the network uses access points to connect to the corporate network or internet. Select Ad-Hoc to set up a private network with one or more participants. 7 Enter the SSID (Network Name) if different than the profile name. 8 Tap OK. Configuring WEP Security With Profile Wizard 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose None. 3 For Association, choose Open or Shared to match the settings on your access point. 4 For Encryption, choose WEP. 5 From the Data TX Key list, select the key you want to use for transmitting data. 6 Define a value for the keys you want to use. You can define up to four keys (Key 1 through Key 4). Enter an ASCII key or a hex key that is either 5 bytes or 13 bytes long depending on the capability of the radio. Set a 5-
66 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe byte value for 64-bit WEP or a 13-byte value for 128-bit WEP. Hex keys must be preceded by 0x and contain 5 or 13 hex pairs. 7 Tap OK. Configuring WPA-PSK Security With Profile Wizard 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose None. 3 For Association, choose WPA. 4 For Pre-Shared Key field, enter the passphrase as ASCII. The passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters and match the passphrase on the access point. 5 Tap OK. Configuring WPA2-PSK Security With Profile Wizard 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose None. 3 For Association, choose WPA2. 4 For Pre-Shared Key field, enter the passphrase as ASCII. The passphrase must be 8 to 63 characters and match the passphrase on the access point. 5 Tap OK. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 67 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Configuring PEAP Security With Profile Wizard Protected EAP (PEAP) performs secure authentication against Windows domains and directory services. It is comparable to EAP-TTLS, though not as flexible. To configure PEAP security 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose PEAP. 3 For Association, choose Open, WPA, or Network EAP. 4 For Encryption, choose TKIP if you selected WPA for association, or WEP if you selected Network EAP for association. 5 For Username, type a unique username for this protocol. 6 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or select Use following password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use the CK21 I-Safe. 7 In the Password field, type a unique password for this protocol. 8 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. For help with certificates, see Loading a Certificate on page 76. 68 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 9 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner PEAP authentication and set options for server certificate validation and trust. 10 From the Inner PEAP Authentication list, choose EAP/MS-
CHAP-V2, EAT/Token Card, or EAP/MD5-Challenge. 11 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using PEAP. 12 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, and then tap OK. 13 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. 14 Tap OK. Configuring TLS Security With Profile Wizard EAP-TLS is a protocol based on the Transport Layer Security
(TLS) protocol widely used to secure web sites. This protocol requires both the user and authentication server to have certificates for mutual authentication. To configure TLS security 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose TLS. 3 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. 4 For Encryption, choose TKIP or AES if you selected WPA2 for association, or WEP or CKIP if you selected Network EAP for association. 5 For Username, type a unique username for this protocol. 6 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or select Use following password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use the CK32 I-Safe. 7 In the Password field, type a unique password for this protocol. 8 Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. For help with certificates, see Loading a Certificate on page 76. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 69 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 9 Tap Additional Settings to Certificate Settings. 10 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using TLS. 11 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, and then tap OK. 12 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. 13 Tap OK. Configuring TTLS Security With Profile Wizard TTLS protocol provides authentication like EAP-TLS but does not require user certificates. User authentication is done using a password or other credentials that are transported in a securely encrypted tunnel established using server certificates. To configure TTLS security 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose TTLS. 3 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. 4 For Encryption, choose TKIP or AES if you selected WPA2 for association, or WEP or CKIP if you selected Network EAP for association. 5 For Username, type a unique username for this protocol. 6 In the Password field, type a unique password for this protocol. 7 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or select Use following password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use the CK32 I-Safe. 8 (Optional) Tap Get Certificates to obtain or import server certificates. For help with certificates, see Loading a Certificate on page 76. 9 Tap Additional Settings to assign an inner TTLS authentication, inner EAP, and set options for server certificate validation and trust. 70 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 10 From the Inner TTLS Authentication list, choose PAP, CHAP, MS-CHAP, MS-CHAP-V2, PAP/Token Card, or EAP. 11 If you select EAP for the inner authentication protocol, select an inner EAP protocol from the Inner EAP list. 12 Check Validate Server Certificate to verify the identity of the authentication server based on its certificate when using PEAP. 13 Tap Root CA, select a root certificate, and then tap OK. 14 Enter the Common Names of trusted servers. 15 For Anonymous EAP-TTLS Name, type an outer identity to protect your login name or identity. 16 Tap OK. Configuring LEAP Security With Profile Wizard LEAP is the Cisco Lightweight version of EAP. To configure LEAP security 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose LEAP. 3 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 71 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 4 For Encryption, choose TKIP or AES if you selected WPA2 for association, or WEP or CKIP if you selected Network EAP for association. 5 For Username, type a unique username for this protocol. 6 In the Password field, type a unique password for this protocol. 7 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or select Use following password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use the CK32 I-Safe. 8 Tap OK. Configuring EAP-FAST with Profile Wizard The EAP-FAST protocol is a client-server security architecture that encrypts EAP transactions with a TLS tunnel. While similar to PEAP, EAP-FAST differs significantly since tunnel establishment is based on strong secrets unique to users. These secrets are called Protected Access Credentials (PACs), which CiscoSecure ACS generates using a master key known only to CicsoSecure ACS. EAP-FAST does not require certificate management. 1 In the Profile Wizard, select the Security page. 2 For 8021x Security, choose EAP-FAST. 3 For Association, choose Open, WPA, WPA2, or Network EAP. 4 For Encryption, choose WEP or CKIP if you selected Network EAP for association. 5 For Username, type a unique username for this protocol. 6 In the Password field, type a unique password for this protocol. 7 Select Prompt for password to have the user enter this password each time to access the protocol, or select Use following password to use the protocol without entering a password each time you use the CK32 I-Safe. 8 Tap Additional Settings to set options for PAC management and assign an anonymous EAP-FAST name. 72 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 9 Tap PAC Manager to view the PAC files currently installed on the CK32 I-Safe. Tap ok to return to the Additional Settings screen. 10 If you already have a PAC on the CK32 I-Safe, clear Allow Automatic PAC provisioning to avoid receiving more PACs from the server. 11 If Allow Automatic PAC provisioning is selected, you can check:
Prompt before acquiring a new PAC for notification of any incoming PACs. Prompt before replacing a PAC for notification whether to replace a current PAC with an incoming PAC. 12 For Anonymous EAP-FAST Name, type the outer identity assigned for public usage. 13 Tap OK. Configuring Microsoft Security The default security setting is Funk. If you want to use Microsoft security, you need to select it as your security choice. After you select Microsoft as your security choice, you will be prompted to save your settings and reset your computer for your change to take effect. To select Microsoft security as your security choice 1 Select Start > Settings > the System tab > Intermec Settings. The Intermec Settings application appears. 2 Select Communications > 802.11 Radio > Security Choice. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 73 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 3 From the Security Choice list, select Microsoft Security and save your settings. An alert box appears telling you that you must save your settings and warm boot the CV30 for the new security choice to take effect. 4 An alert box appears telling you that you must save your settings and warm boot the CK32 I-Safe for the new security choice to take effect. Tap Yes to warm boot the CK32 I-Safe with Microsoft Security as the Security Choice. 74 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Networks already configured are preferred networks. You can connect to only preferred networks or search for and connect to any available network. You can add a wireless network when the network is detected or manually by entering settings information. To determine if authentication information is needed, see your network administrator. When the CK32 I-Safe restarts with Microsoft selected as the security choice, a dialog box with your wireless network information appears. You can connect to an existing preferred connection or set up a new connection. The following information is for setting up a new connection. To configure Microsoft security for a new connection 1 In the radio network connection dialog box, double-tap Add New. 2 Enter a network name. If the network was detected, the network name is entered and cannot be changed. 3 (Optional) To connect to an ad-hoc connection, select This is a computer-to-computer (ad-hoc) network; wireless access points are not used. 4 Follow these steps to disable authentication:
a Set Authentication to Open if WEP keys are not required or to Shared when WEP keys are required for association. b Set Data Encryption to Disabled. Follow these steps to enable WEP encryption:
a Set Authentication to Open if WEP keys are not required or to Shared when WEP keys are required for association. b Set Data Encryption to WEP. c To change the network key, clear The key is provided automatically check box, enter the new Network key, and then select the appropriate Key index. Follow these steps to enable WPA authentication:
a Set Authentication to WPA. b Set Data Encryption to either WEP or TKIP. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 75 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe Follow these steps to enable WPA authentication using a preshared key:
a Set Authentication to WPA-PSK. b Set Data Encryption to either WEP or TKIP. c Enter the new Network key. 5 From the EAP type list, select either MD5-Challenge, PEAP or TLS. 6 Tap OK to close the screen. Note: If you select to automatically connect to non-preferred networks, the CK32 I-Safe detects any new networks and provides you with the opportunity to configure them. Loading a Certificate If you choose to use transport layer security (TLS) with WPA or 802.1x security, you need to have a unique client certificate on the CK32 I-Safe and a trusted root certificate authority (CA) certificate. You can use a third-party CA to issue unique client certificates and a root certificate. There are three ways to load certificates on the CK32 I-Safe:
If you are using Active Directory to issue certificates, you can use the Enroll Certificates application to load the certificates. If you are using another third-party CA, you can use the Import Certificates application to load the certificates. If you have multiple certificates to install, you can use the Import Root Certificates and Import User Certificates functions. Note: For certificates to be valid, the CK32 I-Safe must be set to the correct date and time. After cold booting the CK32 I-Safe, you may need to correct the date and time. To load certificates if you are using Active Directory 1 Configure the network and radio settings for the CK32 I-Safe to communicate with your certificate authority or establish an ActiveSync connection with the CA. 76 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 2 From Intermec Settings, select Communications > 802.11 Radio > Certificates. 3 Select Enroll Certificates and tap the Run App button. The Enroll Certificates dialog box appears. 4 In the Enroll Certificates dialog box, enter the User Name, Password, and Server (IP address) to log into the CA server. 5 Tap OK. A dialog box appears asking if you want to load the root certificate. 6 Tap OK for yes. The Enrollment Tool message box appears telling you that the user certificate has been added. 7 Tap OK to close the Enrollment Tool message box. 8 Configure your CK32 I-Safe for WPA, or 802.1x security. To load certificates if you are using a third-party CA 1 From Intermec Settings, select Communications > 802.11 Radio > Certificates. 2 Select Import Certificates and tap the Run App button. The certificates application appears. 3 Tap in the Import pfx Certificate box and navigate to your private .pfx file. 4 Select the file and the path to your .pfx file now appears in the text box. 5 Tap Import Certificate. A dialog box appears asking if you want to add the certificate to the root store. 6 Press OK to add the certificate. A message box appears telling you that the root certificate has been imported. 7 Tap OK to close the Success message box. 8 Tap Import User Cert. A dialog box appears telling you that the user certificate and the associated key were successfully imported. 9 Tap OK to close the Success message box. 10 Configure your CK32 I-Safe for WPA, or 802.1x security. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 77 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe To load multiple certificates 1 Create the \Temp\Root and the \Temp\User folders on the CK32 I-Safe. 2 Copy at least one root certificate .cer file into the \Temp\Root folder. 3 Copy at least one user certificate .cer file and key .pvk file into the \Temp\User folder. The filenames must match (for example, cert1.cer and cert1.pvk). 4 From Intermec Settings, select Communications > 802.11 Radio > Certificates. 5 Select Import Root Certificates = False. Choose True from the drop-down menu. 6 Select Import User Certificates = False. Choose True from the drop-down menu. 7 Exit Intermec Settings and save your settings. The certificates are immediately imported:
a All root certificates in \Temp\Root are imported into the Trusted Authorities certificate store. Note: You are prompted when a root certificate is imported, unless that certificate is already in the store. b All certificate and key files in \Temp\User are imported into the My Certificates certificate store. c The Import Root Certificates and the Import User Certificates settings are changed from True to False. 8 Configure your CK32 I-Safe for WPA, or 802.1x security. 78 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Disabling Security Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe If you choose not to use security with your wireless network, you can disable it on the CK32 I-Safe. Intermec recommends that you always set security in your network. To disable security 1 Open Intermec Settings. 2 Choose Communications > 802.11 Radio > Microsoft Security. 3 For Network Authentication, choose Open. 4 For Data Encryption, choose Disabled. 5 Close Intermec Settings. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 79 Chapter 3 Configuring the CK32 I-Safe 80 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 4 Developing and Installing Applications Use this chapter to understand the guidelines for developing applications and converting existing Trakker Antares applications for use on the CK32 I-Safe. You will also find information on installing applications and automatically launching them. This chapter contains these sections:
Developing Applications for the CK32 I-Safe Launching an Application Automatically Installing Applications on the CK32 I-Safe CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 81 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Developing Applications for the CK32 I-Safe The CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computers run applications programmed in Microsoft Visual Studio 2003 or later. You can also use Microsoft eMbedded Visual C++ version 4.2 or later, but some features may not be available. Use this section to understand the hardware and software you need to:
develop a new application for the CK32 I-Safe. develop a web-based application for the CK32 I-Safe. convert a Trakker Antares application to a CK32 I-Safe application. Developing a New Application Using the Intermec Developer Library Use the Intermec resource kits to develop new applications to run on the CK32 I-Safe. The Intermec resource kits are a library of C#, C++, and .NET components grouped by functionality that you can use to create applications for the CK32 I-Safe. The resource kits are part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), and can be downloaded from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. At a minimum, you need the following hardware and software components to use the Intermec resource kits:
Pentium PC, 400 MHz or higher Windows 2000 (Service Pack 2 or later) or Windows XP
(Home, Professional, or Server) For native and managed development, Microsoft Visual Studio 2005 128 MB RAM (196 MB recommended) 360 MB hard drive space for minimum installation (720 MB for complete) CD-ROM drive compatible with multimedia PC specification VGA or higher-resolution monitor (Super VGA recommended) Microsoft Mouse or compatible pointing device 82 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Developing a Web-Based Application You can develop web-based data collection applications for use on the CK32 I-Safe. For help, see any HTML source book. The CK32 I-Safe contains Internet Explorer Mobile for you to use. Microsoft Internet Explorer Mobile is available from the Start menu and provides all of the common elements you expect to find. Converting a Trakker Antares Application for the CK32 I-Safe If you have an existing Trakker Antares application that you would like to run on the CK32 I-Safe, you can use the Antares Migration Resource Kit to convert it. The Antares Migration Resource Kit is a set of libraries and tools that you use to convert your existing Trakker Antares C applications into C++
applications for use on the CK32 I-Safe. The CK32 I-Safe does not support all Trakker Antares functions. You may need to rewrite parts of your application when converting it for use on the CK32 I-Safe. See the resource kit for a list of functions that are not supported. You need these hardware and software components to use the resource kit:
PC with at least 100 MB of free disk space running Microsoft Windows 2000/XP Microsoft Visual Studio 2003 (or later) Microsoft eMbedded Visual C++ version 4.2 or later Antares Migration Resource Kit (from IDL 2.4 or later) The resource kit is part of the Intermec Developer Library (IDL), which you can download from the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com/idl. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 83 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Installing Applications on the CK32 I-Safe There are several ways you can install applications on the CK32 I-Safe:
You can package your application as a cabinet (.cab) file. If you have a simple application, you may only need to deliver the .exe file. You can copy a directory structure that contains the application, supporting files, DLLs, images, and data files. Intermec recommends using .cab files to install your applications. The CK32 I-Safe uses standard Windows Mobile .cab files and will install third-party .cab files. You can have your .cab files place your application in any of these memory locations on the CK32 I-Safe:
Applications can be installed into the Object Store or the Flash File Store. Both locations are virtual partitions on the embedded storage card in the system. The Object Store will be erased during a clean boot, but the Flash File store will persist. Neither location will be erased during a normal reset of the system. The registry always persists to the Object Store region for normal resets. If you need files and/or registry entries to persist through a clean boot, it is suggested that you use a cab file installed from the Flash File Store area. For more information on clean boots, see Resetting Your Computer on page 110. There are several ways you can install files and applications on the CK32 I-Safe:
SmartSystems server ActiveSync Wavelink Avalanche The following sections explain how to use each one of these processes to install your application on the CK32 I-Safe. 84 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Installing Applications Using SmartSystems Foundation You can use the SmartSystems server to drag-and-drop Intermec applications onto your CK32 I-Safe. The CK32 I-Safe ships with the SmartSystems client, which means it is SmartSystems-
enabled. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation, which you can download from www.intermec.com/SmartSystems. For help using the console, see the online help. To install an application using SmartSystems Foundation 1 Download your application file to your desktop PC. 2 Double-click the application file to install it. The application file should appear in the software vault. 3 From the SmartSystems console in the Software Vault, drag-and-drop the application onto each CK32 I-Safe in your network. Installing Applications Using Microsoft ActiveSync You can use Microsoft ActiveSync to establish a connection between your PC and the CK32 I-Safe. ActiveSync transfers files, synchronizes files, performs remote debugging, and other device management activities. For more information on ActiveSync see Using Microsoft ActiveSync on page 32. You can have a USB or 802.11 b/g ActiveSync connection to the CK32 I-Safe. When you only have a few CK32 I-Safes to update, you can copy files using Windows Explorer on a PC. This procedure assumes that Microsoft ActiveSync is installed on your PC and is up and running. To install an application using ActiveSync 1 Use the AN1 Communications Adapter to connect the CK32 I-Safe to a PC or host via the USB port. Intrinsically Safe rules prohibit direct connection to the CK32 I-Safe. You may have to disconnect and then connect the cable to wake the connection. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 85 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications 2 Wait for a Connected message to appear in the Microsoft ActiveSync application to signal a connection to the CK32 I-Safe. If necessary, select File > Get Connected to initiate a connection. 3 Click Tools > Explore Device to open the Mobile Device window on the CK32 I-Safe. 4 On your desktop PC, locate the .cab file you want to download to the CK32 I-Safe and copy it. 86 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications 5 From the Mobile Device window, open the My Windows Mobile-Based Device folder and navigate to the folder where you want to paste the .cab file. 6 Paste the .cab file into the desired folder. 7 When you are done copying files, reset the CK32 I-Safe. 8 After the CK32 I-Safe is done resetting, tap Start > Programs
> File Explorer to locate the newly copied files. 9 Tap the .cab files to install them. Installing Applications Using Wavelink Avalanche You can use the Wavelink Avalanche device management system to install applications on all of your wireless CK32 I-Safes. The CK32 I-Safe ships with the Avalanche Enabler already loaded on it. In order to use Avalanche Enabler you must also have the Avalanche Administrative Console installed on your PC. To install Avalanche Enabler 1 Tap Start > Programs > File Explorer and navigate to the Windows folder. 2 Locate and tap InstallSelect to launch the application CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 87 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications 3 Tap OK on the Install Select Caution dialog. 88 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications 4 Select Avalanche Enabler and tap the Apply button. 5 You will need to clean boot the CK32 I-Safe to install the selected files. Tap Yes to initiate a clean boot. For help, see Performing a Clean Boot on page 111. This completes the installation process for Install Select. Each time the Avalanche Enabler is activated (typically on a reset), the CK32 I-Safe attempts to connect to the Avalanche Agent. When the CK32 I-Safe connects to the agent, the agent determines whether an update is available and immediately starts the software upgrade, file transfer, or configuration update. You can now install software packages and updates for the CK32 I-Safe using the Avalanche Administrative Console. Schedule the CK32 I-Safe updates or manually initiate an update using the Avalanche Administrative Console. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 89 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications For more information on using Wavelink Avalanche, contact your local Intermec representative or visit the Wavelink web site at www.wavelink.com. Launching An Application Automatically Note: This describes the system component startup for Intermec provided components only. It does not describe the bootstrap loader process. It only describes the component installation process provided by Windows Mobile. It is assumed that you understand the Microsoft Mobile startup procedures and are familiar with how Microsoft components start up. You can configure the various media used in the Windows Mobile system with a folder name and can change the media in the registry of the system. Many of the startup components rely on folder names to locate information files, applications, or other related data. During normal Windows Mobile system startup, there are Intermec-specific and non-Intermec components that require an orderly start to properly function. These non-Intermec components may also need to start themselves so the Windows Mobile device can function properly. Since there are possible configurations that come from using one or more optional built-
in peripheral devices, the platform components starting on the next page are required to manage startup. System components are installed and configured during the power up process from a single starting point. RunAutoRun
(RunAutoRun.exe), built into the operating system image and located in the \Windows\Startup folder, checks for AutoExec
(AutoExec.exe) in a 2577 directory on a mounted volume in this order: miniSD, Object Store (or User Store), which may be non-volatile storage or RAM, and Flash File Store which may map as Object Store (default location for the AutoExec program in Intermec systems). Intermec system applications start from this folder. However, the ordering of mounted volumes does override this feature. RunAutoRun 90 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Folder names used for the mounted volumes above are retrieved from the registry to maintain coherence with the naming of the mounted volumes on the platform. These folder names are not hard-coded. If AutoExec is present in the \SYSTEM folder on any of these media, it executes the program only on the first media it is found on and no other. AutoExec is reserved for Intermec use to configure Intermec-
specific applications. It launches the .cab installer, AutoCab
(AutoCab.exe), to install platform .cab files to the system, such as the SSPB. When the AutoExec is complete, RunAutorun then checks for the existence of AutoRun (AutoRun.exe) and executes this program from the first media it is found on. This order is the same as what is used by AutoExec. AutoRun is reserved for customer use to configure application launch sequences. It launches the AutoCab installer and any customer programs added to the AutoUser.dat file. Shown is the hierarchy of these files. AutoExec (AutoExec.exe) automates operations such as pausing, launching processes, or signaling, and is configured through the AutoExec data file (AutoExec.dat). This script file must be in the same directory as the program itself. Note: Intermec considers the usage of the AutoExec data file as Intermec Private. AutoExec installs Intermec applications such as Data Collection, Security Supplicants, Intermec Management, applets, and shortcuts from components found in the Flash File System. Do not modify the AutoExec data file. Instead, use the AutoRun program to add software components. Usage:
AutoExec AutoExec [-%[W]] [-E=["X"]] [-F=["Y"]] [-LOG=] [-W=[Z]]
CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 91 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications AutoExec Commands Command
-E
-F
-LOG
-W Description Passes an ID to use in a call to SignalStarted. This argument is useful only during system startup that relies on a SignalStarted to call. W is an integer value. Passes a signal event name to use when autoexec completes. X is a string value. Overrides the data file to use. This must be a fully qualified name. Default is autoexec.dat in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program. Y is a string value. Set to any value logs activity to AutoExec.txt (in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program). Default is disabled. Pauses the autoexec process by calling sleep for the number of seconds specified by Z. Z is an integer value. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. AutoExec Keywords Keyword
-E
-F
-LOG
-W Description Passes an ID to use in a call to SignalStarted. This argument is useful only during system startup that relies on a SignalStarted to call. W is an integer value. Passes a signal event name to use when autoexec completes. X is a string value. Overrides the data file to use. This must be a fully qualified name. Default is autoexec.dat in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program. Y is a string value. Set to any value logs activity to AutoExec.txt (in the same location as the AutoExec.exe program). Default is disabled. Pauses the autoexec process by calling sleep for the number of seconds specified by Z. Z is an integer value. 92 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual AutoRun Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications There are two ways to automatically launch your application when you perform a reset on the CK32 I-Safe:
Make sure your .cab file places a shortcut to your application in the \Windows\StartUp folder. Configure the AutoRun program to launch your application. The CK32 I-Safe contains a program called AutoRun.exe which automates operations such as launching other processes. You can configure AutoRun.exe through the AutoRun data file, AutoRun.dat. This script file must be located in the same directory as the program. AutoRun (AutoRun.exe) automates operations such as launching other processes and is configured through the AutoRun data file
(AutoRun.dat). This file must be in the same directory as the program itself. AutoRun supports the following script commands in AutoUser.dat and AutoRun.dat. Note: If you need to add steps at boot time, add them to AutoUser.dat, not to AutoRun.dat. AutoRun.dat is provided by Intermec and is subject to change. AutoUser.dat is the designated place to add steps to the boot time process. Command EXEC CALL CHAIN RUN LOAD Description Launches a specified program, waits for it to complete (up to 10 minutes). Processes a specified file of commands and returns. Processes a specified file of commands and does not return. Loads a specified program and executes it. Loads a specified program and executes it. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 93 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications AutoRun handles quoted file names for the first parameter to allow specifying path names or file names that contain white space. Note only one set of quotes per command is supported. AutoRun.dat entry examples Command RUN CALL Description Flash File Store\Apps\some.exe arg1, arg2, arg3 Flash File Store\2577\usercmds.dat AutoRun supports the following script commands in AutoRun.dat:
AutoRun Script Commands Command QUIET LOGGING SIGNAL CALL RUN LOAD EXEC EXECWAIT WAIT WAITFOR Description Enables user notification when an error occurs. Enables logging to a trace file. Enables the specified named event and is immediately signaled. Useful for notifying other components of the current status. Opens another .dat file to process. After the called file is completed, this file is resumed. Runs a program with a SW_SHOWNORMAL attribute. Autoexec does not wait for the child process to exit. Runs a program with a SW_HIDE attribute. Autoexec waits for 60 seconds for the child process to exit or EXECWAIT seconds if set. Runs the specified program. AutoExec waits 60 seconds for the child process to exit or EXECWAIT seconds if set. Changes the default EXEC wait time from 60 seconds to the number of seconds specified. There is a maximum 10-minute limit imposed. Forces a sleep for the specified number of seconds to occur. Forces a sleep until the named event is signaled. Examples of keyword usage:
; Allow message pop up if an error occurs. QUIET 0 94 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications
; Log any debug output to a trace file. LOGGING 1
; Perform a SetEvent on the event name "autoexec_started". SIGNAL "autoexec_started"
; Include this child data file, childexec.dat. CALL "\childexec.dat"
; Use autocopy to copy the audio control panel from flash file store to the windows directory. Wait for up to 60 seconds for it to exit. EXEC "\Flash File Store\SYSTEM\autocopy.exe" -S"\Flash File Store\System\CPLAudio.cpl" -D"\Windows\CPLAudio.cpl"
; Change the default EXEC wait time to 90 seconds. EXECWAIT 90
; Suspend processing any commands for 10 seconds. WAIT 10
; Suspend processing any commands until event called MyEventName is signaled. WAITFOR "MyEventName"
AutoCopy AutoCopy (AutoCopy.exe) copies/moves files between locations. It has no user interface and is configured through command line arguments. It has support for the following parameters, in no particular order:
Usage:
AutoCopy [-D["W"]] [-L["X"]] [-M[D]] [-Q[Y]] [-S["Z"]]
AutoCopy Script Commands Command
-D
-L
-M
-Q
-S Description Indicates the destination file name and must be fully qualified. W is a string value. Indicates a fully qualified file name for logging to enable. Default is disabled. X is a string value. Moves file to a destination rather than copies the file. Default value is disabled. D is an integer value. D=1 indicates enabled, 0 is disabled. Indicates if a message box should appear when an error occurs. Default is disabled. Y is an integer value. Indicates a source file name and must be fully qualified. Z is a string value. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 95 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications Example:
; use AutoCopy to copy the control panel from flash file store to windows. autocopy.exe -S"\Flash File Store\System\Audio.cpl" -
D"\Windows\Audio.cpl"
; use AutoCopy to move the control panel from flash file store to windows. autocopy.exe -M1 -S"\Flash File Store\System\Audio.cpl" -
D"\Windows\Audio.cpl"
AutoReg The AutoReg (AutoReg.exe) component adds registry information to the Windows Mobile registry. It has no user interface and is configured through command line arguments. Usage:
AutoReg [-D] [-HKey] [-Q] filename AutoReg Script Commands Command
-D
-H
-Q filename Description Deletes the registry file after successfully loading it. This allows for systems that have hives implemented. Saves the registry path, and all child entries, to the specific .REG registry file. Indicates whether a message box should appear when a fatal error occurs. Fully qualified file name to read from or write to, encased in double quotes to support spaces in paths or file names. See examples below. Process return code uses standard error codes defined in WinError.h. Example:
; use AutoReg to install this registry information. autoreg.exe "\Flash File Store\install.reg"
; use AutoReg to install this registry information. Delete the file afterwards. autoreg.exe -D "\Flash File Store\install.reg"
; use AutoReg to extract registry information to a file. autoreg.exe -HHKEY_LOCAL_MACHINE\Software\Intermec\Version
"\version.reg"
96 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual AutoCab Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications The format of the input file, in this example, is the standard registry format which should ease the creation of the input file since there are many publicly available utilities to generate a registry file besides Notepad. One example of a tool is the Microsoft Remote Registry Editor. AutoCab (AutoCab.exe) extracts files, registry settings, and shortcuts from Windows Mobile cabinet (.cab) files. The Windows Mobile startup sequence invokes AutoCab as a part of AutoExec and AutoRun. During the Windows Mobile startup sequence, AutoCab processes all CAB files in the \CabFiles directory relative to the current location of Autocab, unless the location is overridden by command line arguments. AutoCab can run as a stand-alone program to install a CAB file or a directory of CAB files. AutoCab only installs the CAB file if it was not installed before by AutoCab. To track the installation of a .cab file, AutoCab marks the .cab file with the System attribute. This attribute is ignored if the device is performing a clean-boot on a non-
persistent file system. AutoCab preserves the .cab file after installation if the ReadOnly attribute is set. If not set, the .cab file is deleted automatically after installation. Command line switches are described as follows. Usage:
AutoCab [-ChkRst=][-File=][-Force][-Log=][-Move=][-Quiet=][-Show=][-
Signal=]
If <PathName> references a single .cab file, that file is processed. If <PathName> references a directory, all the .cab files in that directory is processed. If <PathName> is a wild card pattern, all files matching that pattern is processed, If <PathName> is omitted, InstallCab processes all the .cab files in directory
\CabFiles. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 97 Chapter 4 Developing and Installing Applications AutoCab Script Commands Command
-ChkRst=
-File=
-Force
-Log=
-Move=
-Quiet=
-Show=
-Signal=
Description Set to 1 to configure AutoCab to check for the Reset flag after all .cab files are installed. This file is created by .cab files that want a clean reset after installation. Default is 0 (do not check for flag). Specifies the .cab files to extract. Note that the specified files need not end with the .cab extension. Forces the specified .cab files to extract regardless of whether it was previously extracted. Set to 1 to create a log file in the same folder that AutoCab is running. Useful for debugging .cab installation. Default is 0 (disabled). Set to 1 to force source .cab file deletion, even when read-only bit set on file. Default is 0
(disabled). Set to 0 to allow AutoCab to display user message box on errors. Useful for debugging .cab installation. Default is 1 (keep quiet). Set to 0 to prevent showing any installation progress interfaces and also prevents canceling the installation. Set to 1 to show normal installation. Set to 2 to show Intermec installation progress interface (user can see what is installing but cannot cancel it). Default is 1 (show normal). Set to string name of signal to use at the completion of .cab installation before a reboot occurs (if enabled). AutoCab uses WaitForSingleObject on this name. Default is disabled. Example:
; Install all cab files in the \Flash File Store\XYZ directory, regardless. AutoCab -FILE="\Flash File Store\XYZ\.cab" -FORCE
; Install only one cab file, use Intermec cab installation display AutoCab -FILE=\myCab\app.cab =show=2 98 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Use this chapter to solve problems you may encounter while using the CK32 I-Safe. You will also find information on booting the computer and routine maintenance. If you have any problems using the CK32 I-Safe, look in this chapter to find a possible solution. This chapter consists of the following section. Upgrading the CK32 I-Safe Using SmartSystems Contacting Product Support Troubleshooting the CK32 I-Safe Resetting Your Computer Cleaning the Scanner Window, Screen, and Computer CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 99 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Upgrading the CK32 I-Safe Using SmartSystems You can use the SmartSystems Foundation application from Intermec to perform operating system upgrades on your CK32 I-Safe. SmartSystems client is installed on your CK32-I-Safe, which means it is SmartSystems-enabled. The console is part of SmartSystems Foundation, which you can download from www.intermec.com/SmartSystems. When you upgrade the operating system, you erase the current configuration and replace it with the new default configuration. You will need to reset the network parameters on the CK32 I-Safe to reestablish communications with other devices in the network. In other words, if you upgrade the operating system and the default registry from the operating system has changed, the registry is rolled back to the new default. When you upgrade your CK32 I-Safe , you are updating the operating system (OS) and the SmartSystems Platform Bundle
(SSPB) files. The SSPB files are stored on the Flash File Store, and deliver Intermec Value Add (IVA) functionality such as data collection, configuration, and wireless security. As new features are added to these components, you can upgrade your SSPB files without needing to upgrade the operating system. Similarly, features added to the operating system do not affect the functionality of the SSPB, and you can choose to upgrade only the operating system. If you choose to update only the operating system, the SSPB will need to be re-installed. If you are upgrading the OS and SSPB files, you first install the OS upgrade and then you install the SSPB upgrade. The installation process is very similar for both type of upgrade but the way the files install is different. Downloading the Upgrade Files You need to download the latest upgrade files from the Intermec web site to your desktop computer. To download the upgrade files 1 Start your web browser and go to the Intermec web site at www.intermec.com. 2 Go to Service & Support > Downloads. 100 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 3 Select Computers: CK32 I-Safe Mobile Computer from the list. 4 Select the download you need. Make sure the download you select is for the CK32 I-Safe computer and that it contains the upgrade you want: operating system only, SSPB only, or operating system and SSPB. 5 Download the .zip file to your desktop computer. 6 Use the SmartSystems server to upgrade the CK32 I-Safe. Note: You cannot install the files for the OS and the SSPB bundle at the same time. You need to install one and then install the other or install only the bundle that you need to upgrade. To Upgrade the Operating System 1 Connect your the CK32 I-Safe to your network that has the SmartSystem Server installed. 2 Install SmartSystems Foundation on your desktop or laptop computer, then double-click the icon on your toolbar to start the SmartSystems Console. 3 Double-click the SmartSystems icon on your taskbar to start the SmartSystems Console. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 101 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance The SmartSystem Console screen has three sections:
Keypad Computers (devices you are using) SmartSystem Applications (used to upgrade) Software Vault (where your upgrades are stored) 4 Click the Discover icon on the SmartSystems Console. Your CK32 I-Safe should appear in the Keypad Computers area of the screen. 5 Click and drag the OS bundle from the Software Vault and drag to the C32 I-Safe icon. Release the OS bundle on the device icon and the following message will appear. 6 Click the Yes button and SmartSystems Server will start transferring files to the CK32 I-Safe. A white screen with text on it will appear on the CK32 I-Safe icon as the files are being downloaded. Make sure that the CK32 I-Safe does not suspend during the download or errors could occur. When the file download is complete, the CK32 I-Safe performs a warm boot and starts to install the upgrade files. After the OS file installation is completed, the CK32 I-Safe warm boots again and the Windows Mobile welcome screen appears. You will need to recalibrate the screen at this time. To upgrade the SSPB 1 Connect your the CK32 I-Safe to your network that has the SmartSystem Server installed. 2 Install SmartSystems Foundation on your desktop or laptop computer, then double-click the icon on your toolbar to start the SmartSystems Console. 102 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 3 Double-click the SmartSystems icon on your taskbar to start the SmartSystems Console. 4 Click the Discover icon on the SmartSystems Console. Your CK32 I-Safe should appear in the Keypad Computers area of the screen. 5 Click and drag the SSPB bundle from the Software Vault and drag to the C32 I-Safe icon. Release the SSPB bundle on the device icon. 6 Click the Yes button when the SmartSystem message appears. The SmartSystems Server will start transferring files to the CK32 I-Safe. A white screen with text on it will appear on the CK32 I-Safe icon as the files are being downloaded. Make sure that the CK32 I-Safe does not suspend during the download or errors could occur. When the file download is complete, the CK32 I-Safe performs a warm boot and starts to install the upgrade files. When the Today screen appears, SSPB file installation begins. After all files are installed, you will need to reconnect the CK32 I-Safe to your network. Contacting Product Support If you cannot find the answer to your problem in the Troubleshooting the CK32 I-Safe section, you can visit the Intermec technical knowledge base (Knowledgebase Central) at intermec.custhelp.com to review technical information or to request technical support. To talk to an Intermec Product Support representative, call 1-800-755-5505. Before you call Intermec Product Support, make sure you have the following information ready:
Operating system version Configuration number If you are using security, know the type (Funk or Microsoft) and the full set of parameters CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 103 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Power management settings If you are using terminal emulation (TE), know the version and protocol If you are not using TE, know the language your custom application was written in and the tools you used to create it You can find most of the information listed above in Intermec Diagnostics or Intermec Settings. Consult your application developer for information on your custom application. To find your operating system version Tap Start > Internet Explorer > Intermec. An Intermec page opens and displays the Windows Mobile version loaded on your CK32 I-Safe. To find your configuration number Look at the label on the back of the CK32 I-Safe. To open Intermec Settings Tap Start > Settings > System > Intermec Settings. Troubleshooting the CK32 I-Safe If you send the CK32 I-Safe in for service, it is your responsibility to save the computer data and configuration. Intermec is responsible only for ensuring that the keypad and other hardware features match the original configuration when repairing or replacing your computer. Problems While Operating the CK32 I-Safe If you have trouble operating the CK32 I-Safe, check these problems and possible solutions. 104 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Problems While Operating the CK32 I-Safe Problem You press the Power button to turn on the CK32 I-Safe and nothing happens. The Battery light is blinking. You use your stylus to tap the screen and nothing happens. The blue Ready-to-Work indicator is off. The blue Ready-to-Work indicator is blinking. The blue Ready-to-Work indicator is on. Solutions Make sure the backlight is on by pressing E. Make sure you have a charged battery installed correctly. For help, see Charging and Installing the Battery on page 5. The battery may be discharged. Replace the battery with a spare charged battery, or charge the battery and try again. The battery is running low. Replace the battery with a spare charged battery, or charge the battery. Recalibrate your touch screen. For help, see Using the Touch Screen on page 14. Try these possible solutions:
The Ready-to-Work application (such as TE 2000) has not loaded successfully. For help, see the documentation or online help for the application. The CK32 I-Safe is not running a Ready-to-Work application. The Ready-to-Work application (such as TE 2000) may be running, but is not connected to a host. Verify that the application is properly configured to communicate with the host. A connection has been established, and all network connections are active. There is nothing to troubleshoot. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 105 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Problems While Configuring Security If you have trouble configuring the computer for security, check these problems and possible solutions. Problems While Configuring Security Problem You are using static WEP keys and you have a strong connection to the access point, but you cannot communicate with it. You are setting up multiple access points in a network, with different SSIDs, and the connection fails. You receive a message saying The server certificate has expired or your system date is incorrect after you cold boot the CK32 I-Safe. The CK32 I-Safe indicates that it is not authenticated Solution Make sure that you are using the correct static WEP key. The CK32 I-Safe does not save WEP key values when you change the SSID. Re-enter the WEP key value after you change the SSID and save your changes. You should now be able to connect to the different access points. The correct date and time on the CK32 I-Safe are not always saved through a cold boot. You need to re-enter the date and time, and then save your changes. Make sure that:
the User Name and Password on your CK32 I-Safe match the user name and password on your authentication server. You may need to reenter the password on both your CK32 I-Safe and authentication server. on your authentication server, the user and group are allowed and the group policy is allowed to log in to the server. For help, see the documentation that shipped with your authentication server software. the IP address and secret key for your access point must match the IP address and secret key on your authentication server. You may need to re-enter the IP address and secret key on both your access point and authentication server. 106 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Problems with Wireless Connectivity If you have trouble with wireless connectivity, check these problems and possible solutions. Problems With Wireless Connectivity Problem When you turn on the CK32 I-Safe after it was suspended for 10-15 minutes or longer, it can no longer send or receive messages over the network. The network connection icon is in the status bar, but the host computer is not receiving any data from the CK32 I-Safe. The no network connection icon
)appears on the status bar. Solution The host may have deactivated or lost your current terminal emulation session. In a TCP/IP direct connect network, you need to turn off the Keep Alive message
(if possible) from the host so that the TCP session is maintained while a CK32 I-Safe is suspended. In a UDP Plus network, there may be a problem with the connection between the Intermec Application Server and the host computer. Check with your network administrator or see the users manual for the Intermec Application Server. In a TCP/IP network, there may be a problem with the connection between the access point and the host computer. Check with your network administrator or use your access point users manual. The CK32 I-Safe is not connected to the access point. Make sure the access point is turned on and operating. You may also be using the CK32 I-Safe out of range of an access point. Try moving closer to an access point to re-establish communications. Make sure the CK32 I-Safe is configured correctly for your network. The radio parameters on the CK32 I-
Safe must match the values set for all access points the CK32 I-Safe may communicate with. For help, see Setting Up 802.11 Radio Communications on page 45. If you have an 802.11b radio, the radio initialization process may have failed. Try resetting the CK32 I-Safe. See Resetting Your Computer on page 110. If you have tried these possible solutions and the no network connection icon still appears, you may have a defective radio card. For help, contact your local Intermec service representative. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 107 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Problems With Wireless Connectivity (continued) Problem The CK32 I-Safe is connected to the Intermec Application Server or host computer and you move to a new site to collect data. The network connection icon was visible but now the no network connection icon (
While configuring or using wireless printing, you see the message, The Bluetooth COM port does not exist
[55]. This is probably because the computer was just resumed. Please wait a few seconds and try again.
) is visible. While configuring or using wireless printing, you see the message, Bluetooth is off. Would you like to turn it on and continue?
Solution You may have gone out of range of an access point. Try moving closer to an access point or to a different location to re-establish communications. Once you are in range again, the network connection icon appears again. Any data you collected while out of range is transmitted over the network If you recently resumed the CK32 I-Safe, wait a few seconds and try again. Otherwise, you need to make sure that the device you selected as the current wireless printer is a printer, is turned on, and is discoverable. To learn about the current wireless printer and the Bluetooth COM port, see Creating an Application That Lets You Print Wirelessly on page 41. Tap Yes to dismiss the message. Follow the instructions in Setting Up Bluetooth Communications on page 39 to turn on the power to the Bluetooth radio. 108 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Problems While Scanning Bar Codes Problem You cannot see a red beam of light from the scanner when you press the Scan button and aim the scanner at a bar code label. When you release the Scan button or handle trigger, the red beam of light from the scanner does not turn off. The scanner does not read the bar code labels quickly, or the scanning beam seems to be faint or obscured. You scan a valid bar code label to enter data for your application. The data decoded by the scan module does not match the data encoded in the bar code label. Solution You may be too far from the bar code label. Move closer to the bar code label and try again. You may be scanning the bar code label straight on. Change the scanning angle and try again. You can test the effective range of the scanner. Move within 61 cm (2 feet) of a wall and try again. You must be within the scanning range to scan bar code labels. For help, see Scanning Bar Codes on page 18. Press the Scan button or pull the trigger again without scanning a bar code label. If the red beam is still on, contact your local Intermec service representative. The scanner window may be dirty. Clean the window with a solution of ammonia and water. Wipe dry. Do not allow abrasive material to touch the window. Try these possible solutions in order:
The computer may have decoded the bar code label in a symbology other than the labels actual symbology. Try scanning the bar code label again. Make sure you scan the entire label. To operate the computer quickly and efficiently, you should enable only the bar code symbologies that you are going to scan. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 109 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Resetting Your Computer the CK32 I-Safe completely stops responding an application is locked up and stops responding You may need to reset your computer if:
when you upgrade the firmware when you reflash the CK32 I-Safe Preferred Reset Method This procedure is the recommended method in recovering the CK32 I-Safe. It performs a graceful system shutdown and no data is lost in the process. To recover the CK32 I-Safe Press and hold the Power button for about 10 seconds. Secondary Reset Method If performing the preferred reset method does not restore system operation, try using the secondary reset method. This method does not guarantee that cached disk data will be saved, and as such, transactional data may be lost during the reset. All other data is preserved. To press the reset switch 1 Press the Power button to suspend the CK32 I-Safe. 2 With a bent paper clip or similar device, press the recessed reset switch on the CK32 I-Safe keypad. Reset Switch 110 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Performing a Clean Boot Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance If performing either reset method fails to restore system operation, you may have to perform a clean boot. This is a boot method which formats the Object Store (user store) to clean data and registry information from the CK32 I-Safe system and restore them to their factory-default state. The clean boot process will erase the memory in the CK32 I-
Safe, including all applications and data files found in the object store. To preserve application programs through a clean boot they must be stored in the Flash File Store. To perform a clean boot 1 Press the Power button to suspend the CK32 I-Safe. 2 With a bent paper clip or similar device, press the recessed reset switch on the CK32 I-Safe keypad. 3 Press and hold the Power button until a Warning message appears on the display, release the Power button, then read the message. 4 Press and release the right side of the Scan button to perform a clean boot. Press and release the left side of the Scan button to cancel the clean boot. Cleaning the Scanner Window, Screen, and Computer To keep the computer in good working order, you may need to perform these minor maintenance tasks:
clean the scanner window clean the screen clean the computer housing and handle CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 111 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Cleaning the Scanner Window and Screen Clean the scanner window and screen as often as needed for the environment in which you are using the computer. To clean the window and screen, use a solution of ammonia and water. Mixing of ammonia and water should be done in a well ventilated area. There are no user-serviceable parts inside the CK32 I-Safe or in the battery. Opening the unit outside of an Intermec approved service facility will void the I-Safe certification. To clean the scanner window and computer screen 1 Press the Power button to turn off the CK32 I-Safe. 2 Dip a clean towel or rag in the ammonia solution and wring out the excess. Wipe off the scanner window and screen. Do not allow any abrasive material to touch these surfaces. 3 Wipe dry. Cleaning the Handle and Computer The exterior of the computer and the handle should be cleaned with a mild solution of soap and water. Other cleaners may affect the ESD dissipation characteristics of the handle and CK32 I-Safe body. Mild soap refers to soaps you use on your hands and/or body that don't contain any abrasive media or filler. The soap should not contain a large amount of artificial fragrance or any of the following: witch hazel, aloe vera, vegetable and herbal oils such as evening primrose oil, olive oil, or coconut oil, or chamomile, lavender, rosemary or peppermint. Do not use products labeled as detergents. Examples of mild soaps are:
Woolite (an exception to hand/body soaps) Ivory Snow liquid or powder Ivory bar soap Jergens mild soap (bar) 112 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance Add just enough soap to a quantity of water to start and create sudsing (using agitation while adding), but no more; you can't go wrong with this solution. Keep in mind that the water should just be warm; hot water can have adverse affects on some plastics. Ammonia is not compatible with polycarbonates, a major component in the CK32 I-Safe housing; it is NOT recommended as a cleaner. Plastic cleaners like 3M Plastic Cleaner, Plexus, Meguiars PlastX, All Kleer Plastic Cleaner & Polish and the like all have polishes (micro-abrasives) and waxes that make them unsuitable for cleaning the handle and computer. Plastic protectants like Armor All or Son of a Gun are for protecting plastic from UV rays. They clean to some degree, but can leave the product slippery. Use at your own risk. To clean the handle and computer 1 Unscrew the handle and remove it from the CK32 I-Safe. 2 Clean the surface of the magnet with a damp cloth. 3 Use adhesive tape to remove any metal debris from the surface of the magnet in the handle. 4 Clean the computer and handle. 5 Reattach the handle. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 113 Chapter 5 Troubleshooting and Maintenance 114 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual A Specifications CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 115 Appendix A Specifications Physical and Environmental Specifications Use this section to locate technical information about the CK32 I-Safe and its available features and options. Physical Dimensions Length: 24.6 cm (9.41 in) Width: 8.89 cm (3.5 in) Thickness: 7.62 cm (3.0 in) Weight CK32 I-Safe Weight (without battery): 893.59 g (31.52 oz) Battery weight: 194.48 g (6.86 oz) Handle weight: 132.96 g (4.69 oz) Power Specifications Operating: Rechargeable 2400 mA lithium-ion battery Backup: Super capacitor supplies 10 minutes bridge time while replacing the main battery Electrical Specifications Electrical rating: x 7.4 to 12; 500 mA peak Temperature and Humidity Specifications Operating temperature: -20C to 50C (-4F to 122F) Operating humidity: 5 to 90% non-condensing Storage temperature: -20C to 60C with battery 70C without
(-4F to 140F with battery 158F without) Storage humidity: 0 to 95% relative humidity, non-condensing LCD Touch Screen Specifications 240 x 320 QVGA 8.89 cm (3.5 in) diagonal square active area LED backlight with high and low settings No ambient light sensor 116 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter A Specifications Keypad Options 42-key large numeric and function keypad, available with programmable, 3270 TE/5250 TE, and VT/ANSI TE overlays 56-key full alphanumeric keypad, available with programmable, 3270 TE/5250 TE, and VT/ANSI TE overlays Bar Code Symbologies The CK32 I-Safe supports these bar code symbologies:
Codabar Codablock A Codablock F Code 11 Code 2 of 5 Code 39 Code 93 Code 128 EAN.UCC Composite Matrix 2 of 5 Micro PDF417 MSI PDF417 Plessey RSS 14 RSS Limited RSS Expanded Telepen TLC 39 UPC/EAN Interleaved 2 of 5 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 117 Appendix A Specifications Linear Imager Reading Distances Minimum reading distances are measured in the dark (0 lux). Minimum Reading Distances With 0.655 cm (0.258 in) Setback Symbology Code 39 UPC/EAN PDF417 0.5 0.25 R 0.125 MM Bar Code Contents Density RESO 0.100 MM 0.1 mm
(4 mils) 0.125 mm
(5 mils) 0.25 mm
(10 mils) 0.5 mm
(20 mils) 1 mm
(40 mils) 0.33 mm
(13 mils) 0.254 mm
(10 mils) 0.381 mm
(15 mils) 120010010100 R1MM 15 mils 10 mils Minimum Distance 10.27 cm
(4.04 in) 9.25 cm
(3.64 in) 5.44 cm
(2.14 in) 3.41 cm
(1.34 in) 6.96 cm
(2.74 in) 4.42 cm
(1.74 in) 9.25 cm
(3.64 in) 7.22 cm
(2.84 in) Maximum Distance 13.31 cm
(5.24 in) 16.36 cm
(6.44 in) 23.22 cm
(9.14 in) 30.33 cm
(11.94 in) 39.22 cm
(15.44 in) 25.25 cm
(9.94 in) 16.10 cm
(6.34 in) 18.39 cm
(7.24 in) 118 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual in 10"
8"
6"
4"
2"
0"
2"
4"
6"
8"
10"
Chapter A Specifications 0"
2"
4"
6"
8"
10"
12"
14"
16"
18"
20"
100% contrast UPC/
EAN 0.125 mm/
5 mil 0.25 mm/10 mil 0.5 mm/20 mil 1 mm/40 mil 25 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 15 20 25 0 5 10 15 20 25 30 35 40 45 50 cm Linear Imager Minimum Reading Distances: This graphic does not include the 0.665 cm (0.258 in) setback for the CK32 I-Safe. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 119 Appendix A Specifications Minimum Reading Distances With 1.087 cm (0.428 in) Setback Symbology Density Code 39 0.125 mm (5 mils) 0.25 mm (10 mils) 0.5 mm (20 mils) 1 mm (40 mils) 1.3 mm (51 mils) UPC/EAN 0.33 mm (13 mils) Minimum Distance 8.564 cm (3.272 in) 5.770 cm (2.272 in) 7.802 cm (3.072 in) 8.818 cm (3.472 in) Depends on the symbology length and scan angle 5.516 cm (2.172 in) Maximum Distance 17.962 cm (7.072 in) 37.774 cm (14.872 in) 78.922 cm (31.072 in) 130.992 cm (51.572 in) 148.772 cm (58.572 in) 46.918 cm (18.472 in) Typing Characters Not Printed on the Keypads hidden key sequences to access characters not printed on the keypad overlay. Use the following table to understand how to access these hidden characters on the keypads. Typing Hidden Characters on the Keypad Press This Key Sequence on One of the Keypads:
To Type:
Y
, 56-Key 42-Key C and then 6 Not hidden C and then G C and then F9 C and then I Not hidden C and then K C and then F6 C and then L C and then F7 C and then N C and then F11 C and then O C and then F12 C and then P C and then F3 C and then Q C and then F4 C and then R C and then F8 C and then S Not hidden C and then T C and then F10 C and then Alpha Not hidden C and then Right Enter Not hidden 120 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Typing Hidden Characters on the International Keypads Chapter A Specifications To Type:
, Press This Key Sequence on One of the Keypads:
42-Key Not hidden B and then B and then B and then B and then C and then 9 C and then Tab C and then Right Enter 56-Key C and then 6 C and then 9 C and then 0 Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Typing Hidden Characters on the 3270/5250 TE Keypads To Type:
, Press This Key Sequence on One of the Keypads:
42-Key Not hidden B and then B and then C and then Alpha C and then Tab Not applicable Not hidden Not applicable Not applicable B and then B and then Not applicable Not applicable Not hidden Not applicable C and then Right Enter 56-Key C and then 6 Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden C and then G C and then I C and then K C and then L C and then N C key and then O C and then P C and then Q C and then R C and then T Not hidden CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 121 Appendix A Specifications Typing Hidden Characters on the VT/ANSI TE Keypads Press This Key Sequence on One of the Keypads:
To Type:
, 42-Key Not hidden Not applicable Not hidden Not applicable Not applicable B and then B and then Not applicable C and then 5 C and then Alpha C and then Tab B and then B and then C and then Right Enter 56-Key C and then 6 C and then G C and then I C and then K C and then L C and then N C key and then O C and then P C and then R Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden Not hidden You can use these accessories (sold and ordered separately) with the CK32 I-Safe. To order accessories, contact your local Intermec sales representative. AN1 Communications Adapter (P/N 871-223-xxx) An external adapter used to connect the CK32 I-Safe with wired networks. Note: You must use the AN1 Communtications Adapter for all wired connections to the CK32 I-Safe. AC11 Quad Battery Charger (P/N 852-914-xxx) Four battery charger. Charge rate is limited by I-Safe requirements. Handle (P/N 714-625-xxx) The handle provides a convenient scanning trigger. Hand Strap (P/N 825-183-xxx) I-Safe leather hand strap Accessories 122 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Chapter A Specifications Carrying Strap Kit (P/N 825-186-xxx) I-Safe leather carrying strap AB6 Battery Pack (P/N 318-021-xxx) Battery pack Tethered Stylus (P/N 203-828-xxx) Use the tethered stylus to make sure that you never lose your stylus. Battery Eliminator (P/N 714-619-xxx) The battery eliminator provides AC power to your CK32 I-Safe handheld computer. Power Supply (P/N 851-061-xxx) Power supply for the Communications Adapter and Quad Battery Charger. Screen Protector (P/N 346-065-004) Clear covering designed to protect the CK32 I-Safe screen. CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 123 Appendix A Specifications 124 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual I Index CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 125 Index Numerics 3270/5250 TE keypads, typing hidden characters, 121 802.11 network protocols, 45 802.11 radio communications checking status, 47 configuring for UDP Plus network, 47 configuring network parameters, 46 ISpyWiFi status, 48 setting up, 45 A ActiveSync functions, 32 installing, 32 starting, 33 ActiveSynch using, 32 Advanced Encryption Standard (AES), 58 AES data encryption, 58 application installing using SmartSystems Console, 100 audio feedback, understanding, 16 system, explained, 16 authentication server, defined, 58 B bar code symbologies enabling or disabling, 19 bar code symbologies, enabled, 18 bar code, test scan, 20 bar codes, scanning, 18 battery charging and installing, 5 disposal, 4 explosion hazard, 5 maxiimizing life, 6 message, low battery, 7 power settings, 6 status, 6 using, 4 warnings, low battery, 7 beeper volume, 16 Bluetooth audio headset, 45 Bluetooth audio device connecting, 45 Bluetooth communication radio, turning on, 40 range, 39 settings, 41 wireless printing, 41 C certificates issued by loading CJ32 CK32 third party certificate authority, 77 multiple certificates, 78 with Import Certificates, 77 SmartSystems Foundation, configuring with, 37 802.11 securtity, 59 accessories, 122 battery, 4 certificate, loading, 76 cleaning, 111 configuring security, 56 developing applications, 82 disabling security, 79 features, 3 Funk and Microsoft Security, chosing between, 60 hidden characters, typing, 120 LEAP security, 59 linear imager reading distances, 118 Microsoft security, new connection, 75 operating paramters, configuring, 36 problems configuring security, 106 problems scanning bar codes, 109 problems while operating, 104 resetting, 110 security types, 56 troubleshooting, 104 wireless connectivity, 107 WPA security, 57 cleaning handle and computer, 112 126 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual scanner windown and screen, 112 color-coded keys, using, 10, 11 configuring LEAP security, 63 WEP security with Funk security, 64 with Microsoft security, 75 WPA security with Microsoft security, 75 WPA-PSK security with Microsoft security, 76 with Profile Wizard, 67 D developing applications AutoCab, 97 AutoCopy, 95 AutoExec, 91 AutoReg, 96 AutoRun, 93 installing applications, 84 Intermec Developer Library, using, 82 launching automatically, 90 RunAutoRun, 90 Trakker Antares, converting from, 83 web-based, 83 drag-and-drop, using SmartSystems Console, 100 E EAP, defined, 58 EAP-FAST security configuring with Profile Wizard, 72 Enterprise mode, defined, 58 Ethernet communication status, checking, 39 Ethernet communications setting up, 37 Etnernet communciations Intermec Settings, using, 38 Extensible Authentication Protocol (EAP), defined, 58 F Funk securitiy Funk Security features, 60 Intermec Settings, configuring with, 60 Index Funk security configuring LEAP security, 63 WEP, 64 profile wizard, 65 select profile, 60, 65 WPA security, configuring, 61 G green key, using, 11 I IConnect Ethernet, configuring, 39 Import Certificates, 77 Import Root Certificates, 78 Import User Certificates, 78 installing applications Installing applications ActiveSynch, 85 installing applications using SmartSystems Console, 100 SmartSystems Foundation, 85 Wavelink Avalanche, 87 Intermec Developer Library (IDL) required hardware, 82 required software, 82 Intermec Product Support contacting, 103 operating system version, 104 product information, required, 103 Intermec Settings navigating, 37 starting, 36 using, 36 ISpyWiFi graph function, 55 ISpyWiFi tab contents, 50 list function, 55 Ping tab contents, 54 place in Programs group, 48 startinc from iConnect, 49 supplicant logging, 55 Supplicant tab contents, 52 WiFi scan tab contents, 51 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 127 Index K keypad 42-key illustrated, 9 56-key illustrated, 10 terminal emulation, 8 using, 8 using color-coded keys, 11 L LEAP security configuring, 63 configuring with Profile Wizard, 71 required equipment, 59 Load certificate active directory, using, 76 third-party CA, 77 M manuals Data Collection Browser Client Users Guide, 3 iBrowse Users Guide, 3 TE2000 Terminal Emulation Programmers Guide, 3 Microsoft security configuring, 73 configuring WEP, 75 configuring WPA, 75 configuring WPA-PSK, 76 Minimum, 120 O orange key, using, 11 P passphrase setting with Profile Wizard, 67 PEAP security configuring with Profile Wizard, 68 power key, using, 11 Pre-Shared Key mode, defined, 58 Profile Wizard using to configure WPA-PSK security, 67 Profile wizard WEP security, configuring, 66 programs adding or removing, 32 PSK mode, defined, 58 R resetting CK32 clean boot, 111 preferred method, 110 secondary method, 110 S security configuring LEAP, 63 WEP, 64 WEP security with Microsoft, 75 WPA security with Microsoft, 75 WPA-PSK security with Microsoft, 76 with Profile Wizard, 67 WEP overview, 58 SmartSystems Console using to install applications, 100 SmartSystems Foundation server and console, 37 specifications bar code symbologies, supported, 117 electrical specifications, 116 keypad options, 117 LCD, 116 physical dimensions, 116 power specifications, 116 temperature and humidity, 116 weight, 116 Start screen, 14 status lights, explained, 12 stylus, using, 15 System software updates, 100 T taskbar illustrated, 14 TCP/IP wireless communication, 46 TCP/IP Network configuring parameters, 46 terminal emulation, typing hidden characters, 121 128 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual third party certificate authority, using to issue certificates, 77 configuring with Profile Wizard, 69 TLS security touch screen aligning, 15 touch screen, using, 14 troubleshooting wireless connectivity, 107 TTLS security configuring with Profile Wizard, 70 U UDP Plus network wireless communications, 47 Updating the system software, 100 upgrading downloading files, 100 operating system, 101 SSPB, 102 Upgrading the operating system, 100 using green key, 11 orange key, 11 V verify scanner operation, 19 volume beeper volume, disable, 17 W WEP security configuring with Funk security, 64 with Microsoft security, 75 overview, 58 Windos Mobile introduction, 24 Windows Mobile accessing programs, 26 Index block recognizer, using, 29 command bar, 26 companion programs, 24 entering information, 27 File Exporer, using, 30 Internet Explorer, using, 34 keyboard,typing, 28 navigation bar, 26 pop-up menus, 27 screen, writing on, 30 settings, adjusting, 30 support, 25 text, typing, 30 touch screen, 25 transcriber, using, 29 wireless communications troubleshooting, 107 wireless printer device address, entering, 44 wireless printing applet, 42 choosing printer, 44 discover printer, 43 from application, 41 select printer, 42 WPA security configuring WPA2 security overview, 58 WPA2-PSK security with Microsoft security, 75 configuring with Funk security, 62 configuring with Profile Wizard, 67 WPA-PSK security configuring with Microsoft security, 76 configuring with Funk security, 62 configuring with Profile Wizard, 67 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual 129 Index 130 CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual Worldwide Headquarters 6001 36th Avenue West Everett, Washington 98203 U.S.A. tel 425.348.2600 fax 425.355.9551 www.intermec.com CK32 I-Safe Handheld Computer Users Manual
*935-006-001*
P/N 935-006-001
| frequency | equipment class | purpose | ||
|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 | 2008-05-01 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment |
| 2 | 2008-04-02 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 3 | 2008-03-12 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 4 | 2007-07-12 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 5 | 2005-09-29 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 6 | 2005-07-14 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | |
| 7 | 2004-11-24 | 2402 ~ 2480 | DTS - Digital Transmission System | Original Equipment |
| app s | Applicant Information | |||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Effective |
2008-05-01
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2008-04-02
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2008-03-12
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2007-07-12
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2005-09-29
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2005-07-14
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
2004-11-24
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Applicant's complete, legal business name |
Intermec Technologies Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | FCC Registration Number (FRN) |
0003729654
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Physical Address |
9680 Old Bailes Rd.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Fort Mill, South Carolina 29707
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
United States
|
|||||
| app s | TCB Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | TCB Application Email Address |
d******@nwemc.com
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
c******@curtis-straus.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
d******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | TCB Scope |
A4: UNII devices & low power transmitters using spread spectrum techniques
|
||||
| app s | FCC ID | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Grantee Code |
HN2
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Equipment Product Code |
BTM311
|
||||
| app s | Person at the applicant's address to receive grant or for contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
B****** R******
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Title |
VP & GC, Honeywell Scanning & Mobility
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
803-8********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
803-8********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
b******@honeywell.com
|
|||||
| app s | Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation (Hwa Ya)
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Northwest EMC, Inc.
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
G****** C********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
G******** K****
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
22975 NW Evergreen Parkway
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
United States
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
503-8********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
503-8********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
G******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
g******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
| app s | Non Technical Contact | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Firm Name |
Advance Data Technology Corporation
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Northwest EMC, Inc.
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
E****** W********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
V******** A******
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Physical Address |
No. 19, Hwa Ya 2nd Rd., Kwei Shan Hsiang
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
22975 NW Evergreen Parkway
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Taoyuan Hsien, 333
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Hillsboro, Oregon 97124
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Taiwan
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
United States
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
886-3******** Extension:
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
503-8********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
886-3********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
503-8********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
e******@adt.com.tw
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
v******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
| app s | Confidentiality (long or short term) | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Long-Term Confidentiality Does this application include a request for confidentiality for any portion(s) of the data contained in this application pursuant to 47 CFR § 0.459 of the Commission Rules?: | No | ||||
| if no date is supplied, the release date will be set to 45 calendar days past the date of grant. | ||||||
| app s | Cognitive Radio & Software Defined Radio, Class, etc | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Is this application for software defined/cognitive radio authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Equipment Class | DTS - Digital Transmission System | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Description of product as it is marketed: (NOTE: This text will appear below the equipment class on the grant) | BTM311 | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Related OET KnowledgeDataBase Inquiry: Is there a KDB inquiry associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Equipment Type | Single Modular Approval | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Purpose / Application is for | Class II permissive change or modification of presently authorized equipment | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Original Equipment | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Composite Equipment: Is the equipment in this application a composite device subject to an additional equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Related Equipment: Is the equipment in this application part of a system that operates with, or is marketed with, another device that requires an equipment authorization? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Yes | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Grant Comments | Single Modular | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except as follows. Optional collocated transmitter operating configuration with FCC IDs HN2-PB42, EHA802UIAG, EHABTS080-2, EHADRCB and EHA-RN41A have been evaluated as described in filings under this FCC ID. Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except as follows. Optional collocated transmitter operating configuration with FCC IDs HN2-PB42, EHA802UIAG, EHABTS080-2, EHADRCB, EHAIM4, EHA-BTM4 have been evaluated as described in filings under this FCC ID. Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter, except as follows. Optional collocated transmitter operating configuration with FCC IDs HN2-PB42, EHA802UIAG, EHABTS080-2, EHADRCB have been evaluated as described in filings under this FCC ID. Other collocation configurations require separate evaluation. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. The first Class II permissive change filing evaluated collocation with FCC IDs HN2-PB42, EHA802UIAG. This second Class II permissive change filing has evaluated the co-location with FCC ID: EHABTS080-2 | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be collocated or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. This Class II permissive change filing has evaluated collocation with FCC IDs HN2-PB42, EHA802UIAG. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Modular Approval. This device and its antenna(s) must not be co-located or operating in conjunction with any other antenna or transmitter. End-users must be provided with specific operating instructions for satisfying RF exposure compliance. | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Is there an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application? | No | ||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | If there is an equipment authorization waiver associated with this application, has the associated waiver been approved and all information uploaded? | No | ||||
| app s | Test Firm Name and Contact Information | |||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Firm Name |
Northwest EMC, Inc.
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
Bureau Veritas CPS (H.K.) Ltd. Taoyuan Branch
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Name |
G**** K****
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
R******** C****
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Telephone Number |
503-8********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
886-3******** Extension:
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
503-8******** Extension:
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 | Fax Number |
503-8********
|
||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
886-3********
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
g******@nwemc.com
|
|||||
| 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 |
r******@tw.bureauveritas.com
|
|||||
| Equipment Specifications | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|---|
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 1 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 2 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 3 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 4 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 5 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 6 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| Line | Rule Parts | Grant Notes | Lower Frequency | Upper Frequency | Power Output | Tolerance | Emission Designator | Microprocessor Number | |||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
| 7 | 1 | 15C | 2402.00000000 | 2480.00000000 | 0.0086900 | ||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||||
some individual PII (Personally Identifiable Information) available on the public forms may be redacted, original source may include additional details
This product uses the FCC Data API but is not endorsed or certified by the FCC